operating instructions - copy reference (usa): russian c1a ... · pdf filewest caldwell, new...

307
220/270 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS COPY REFERENCE Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.

Upload: hoangthu

Post on 13-Mar-2018

212 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

220/270

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

COPY REFERENCE

uture

Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for freference.For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.
Page 2: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

220/270 O

RICOH COMPANY, LTD.15-5, 1 chome, Minami-Aoyama, Minato-ku, Tokyo Telephone: Tokyo 3479-3111

PERATIN

Overseas Affiliates

G IN

STRUC

TION

S

U.S.A.RICOH CORPORATION5 Dedrick PlaceWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006Phone: +1-973-882-2000

The NetherlandsRICOH EUROPE B.V.Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, AmstelveenPhone: +31-(0)20-5474111

United KingdomRICOH UK LTD.Ricoh House,1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,Middlesex, TW13 7HGPhone: +44-(0)181-261-4000

GermanyRICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbHMergenthalerallee 38-40,65760 EschbornPhone: +49-(0)6196-9060

FranceRICOH FRANCE S.A.383, Avenue du Général de GaulleBP 307-92143 Clamart CedexPhone: +33-(0)1-40-94-38-38

SpainRICOH ESPAÑA S.A.Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,08005 BarcelonaPhone: +34-(0)93-295-7600

ItalyRICOH ITALIA SpAVia della Metallurgia 12,37139 VeronaPhone: +39-(0)45-8181500

Hong KongRICOH HONG KONG LTD.23/F., China Overseas Building,139, Hennessy Road,Wan Chai, Hong KongPhone: +852-2862-2888

SingaporeRICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.260 Orchard Road,#15-01/02 The Heeren,Singapore 238855Phone: +65-830-5888

Printed in Japan

UE USA A267-6607

Page 3: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Introduction

This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To getmaximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions inthis manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information relatedto USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.

Notes:

Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine.

Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Operator Safety:

This machine is considered a CDRH Class I laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine con-tains a 5-milliwat, 760 – 800 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected)eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlockmechanism have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.

Laser Safety:

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unitin the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisiteequipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laserchassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassisand laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is re-quired.

Warning:

Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manualmight result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Notes:

The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your ma-chine before reading this manual. (For details, see ⇒ P.4 “Machine Types”.)

• Type 1: Aficio 220

• Type 2: Aficio 270

Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.

For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.

Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts otherthan genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.

Power Source:

120V, 60Hz, 12A or more

Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about the powersource, see ⇒ P.131 “Power Connection”.

Page 4: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

USA (This information is for facsimile option users only.)

❖ FCC Requirements1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the cover of this equipment is a label that

contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number(REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.

2. This equipment uses the following USOC jack: RJ11C

3. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephoneline. Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response toan incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0).Contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.

4. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify youin advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is notpractical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will beadvised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.

5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or proce-dures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone companywill provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications in order to maintainuninterrupted service.

6. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication),refer to the solving problems section in this manual.

7. If you cannot correct the problem, please contact the RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORTDEPT. at 1-800-FASTFIX for repair and warranty information. If it is causing harm to the tele-phone network, the telephone company may request you to disconnect the equipment from thenetwork until the problem is resolved.

8. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection toParty Line Service is subject to state tariffs.

❖ WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TOEMERGENCY NUMBERS:1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.

2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.

CANADA (This information is for facsimile option users only.)The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipmentmeets telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed inthe appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The department does notguarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facil-ities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an accept-able method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditionsmay not prevent degradation of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier.Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give thetelecommunications company cause to request the user disconnect the equipment.

Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This pre-caution may be particularly important in rural areas.

Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the ap-propriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of themaximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination onan interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum ofthe Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.

In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:a means POWER ON.c means STAND BY.

Copyright © 1999 Ricoh Co., Ltd.

Page 5: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Safety Information

When using your machine, the following safety precautions should be alwaysfollowed.

Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:

R WARNING:Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or even death.

R CAUTION:Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property.

i

Page 6: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

ii

R WARNING:

• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an ex-

tension cord.

• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.

• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manu-al.

• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if any of the following conditions exists:

• You spill something into the equipment.

• You suspect that your equipment needs service or repair.

• Your equipment's cover has been damaged.

• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame.

• Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate col-lection sites.

• Dispose of the used toner bottle in accordance with the local regula-tion.

Page 7: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

R CAUTION:

• Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow,

and so on.

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment. While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the equipment.

• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the plug (not the cable).

• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside the equipment.

• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner bottle out of the reach of children.

• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the equipment or expended supply's wastes at household waste collection point. Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.

• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a label indicating the “hot surface”. Otherwise it could cause a personal burn.

• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-ality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies avail-able at an authorized dealer.

iii

Page 8: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

iv

How to Read this Manual

Symbols

In this manual, the following symbols are used:

R WARNING:This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result indeath or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are de-scribed in the Safety Information section.

R CAUTION:This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injurywhen you misuse the machine without following the instructions under thissymbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the SafetyInformation section.* The statements above are notes for your safety.

ImportantIf this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might bedamaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.

PreparationThis symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-erating.

NoteThis symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misop-eration.

LimitationThis symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.

ReferenceThis symbol indicates a reference.

[ ]Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.

{ }Keys built into the machine's operation panel.

Page 9: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

TABLE OF CONTENTSWhat You Can do with this Machine (Copy Mode) ................................. 2

Machine Types........................................................................................... 4

Guide to Components ............................................................................... 5

Options....................................................................................................... 7

Operation Panel ......................................................................................... 8

Panel Display ........................................................................................... 11Displays and Key Operations...................................................................... 11

1.Basics

Starting the Machine ............................................................................... 13Turning on the Power.................................................................................. 13Turning off the Power.................................................................................. 14

Changing Modes..................................................................................... 15

Originals................................................................................................... 16Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals .......................................... 16Sizes Difficult to Detect ............................................................................... 17Original Sizes and Scanning Area/Missing Image Area.............................. 18

Copy Paper............................................................................................... 19Recommended Paper Sizes and Types...................................................... 19Non-recommended Paper........................................................................... 22Paper Storage ............................................................................................. 22

Toner......................................................................................................... 23Handling Toner............................................................................................ 23Toner Storage ............................................................................................. 23

Photo Conductor Unit (PCU) .................................................................. 24Handling Photo Conductor Unit................................................................... 24Photo Conductor Unit Storage .................................................................... 24Replacing Photo Conductor Unit ................................................................. 24

2.Copying

Basic Procedure ...................................................................................... 25

Setting Originals...................................................................................... 27Setting Originals on the Exposure Glass .................................................... 27Setting Originals in the Document Feeder .................................................. 27Setting Non-Mstandard Sized Originals in the Document Feeder .............. 29

Basic Functions....................................................................................... 30Adjusting Copy Image Density .................................................................... 30Selecting Your Original Type ...................................................................... 31Selecting Copy Paper ................................................................................. 31Auto Reduce/Enlarge—Having the Machine Choose the Reproduction Ratios ... 33

v

Page 10: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

vi

Sort/Stack/Staple..................................................................................... 35Sort—Sorting into Sets (123, 123, 123) ...................................................... 35Stack—Delivering Copies in Page Batches (111, 222, 333) ....................... 37Staple .......................................................................................................... 38

Copying from the Bypass Tray .............................................................. 41

Program—Storing Your Copy Settings in Memory .............................. 45Storing a Program ....................................................................................... 45Deleting a Program ..................................................................................... 46Recalling a Program.................................................................................... 46

Other Functions....................................................................................... 47Energy Saver Mode—Saving Energy ......................................................... 47Interrupt—Temporarily Stopping One Job to Copy Something Else........... 47User Codes ................................................................................................. 48Auto Start—Entering Copy Job Settings During the Warm-up Period ........ 48Original Tone............................................................................................... 49How to Set the Papers with Letterhead....................................................... 49

Preset Reduce/Enlarge—Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset Ratios ... 50

Zoom—Reducing and Enlarging in 1% Steps....................................... 52

Directional Size Magnification (inch)—Stretching and Squeezing the Image into the Copy Area ............................................................. 53

Directional Magnification (%)—Stretching and Squeezing the Image in 1% Steps ......................................................................... 55

Center/Border Erase—Erasing the Center and the Border ................. 56

Combine—Combining Originals into One Copy................................... 58

Series Copies—Making One-sided Copies from Various Originals ... 62Book —Making One-sided Copies from Two Facing Page of a Bound

Original (Book)......................................................................................... 622-Sided —Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals ................. 63

Duplex—Making Two-Sided Copies ...................................................... 641 Sided —Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals ................. 642 Sided —Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals ................. 66Book —Making Two-Sided Copies from Facing Pages of a Bound

Original (Book)......................................................................................... 67

Cover—Adding or Inserting Sheets....................................................... 68Front Cover—Copying or Adding a Front Cover ......................................... 68Both Covers—Copying or Adding Front and Back Covers ......................... 69

OHP Slip Sheet—Copying or Inserting Slip Sheets ............................. 70

Positive/Negative—Copying in Complementary Colors ...................... 71

Repeat Image—Repeating an Image over the Entire Copy ................. 72

Merging Images (Overlay)—Merging Two Different Originals ............ 73

Preset Stamp—Printing Preset Messages on Your Copies................. 75

Page Numbering—Printing Page Numbers........................................... 78

Combination Chart .................................................................................. 80

Page 11: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

3.What to do If Something Goes Wrong

If Your Machine does not Operate as You Want................................... 83Message...................................................................................................... 83Display ........................................................................................................ 84

If You Cannot Make Clear Copies .......................................................... 85

If You Cannot Make Copies as You Want.............................................. 86Adjust Image ............................................................................................... 86Combine...................................................................................................... 87Stamp.......................................................................................................... 87Duplex ......................................................................................................... 88

B Loading Paper..................................................................................... 89Loading Paper in the Large Capacity Tray.................................................. 90

D Changing the Toner Bottle ................................................................ 91

Replacing Photo Conductor Unit (PCU) ............................................... 93

x Clearing Misfeeds............................................................................... 98

Changing the Paper Size ...................................................................... 103Changing the Paper Size in Tray 1 or the Optional Paper Table .............. 103Changing the Paper Size in Tray 2 ........................................................... 105

d Adding Staples ................................................................................. 107

e Removing Jammed Staples............................................................. 109

4.User Tools (Copy Features)

Accessing the User Tools (Copy Features) ........................................ 111Exiting the User Tools ............................................................................... 112

User Tools Menu (Copier Features)..................................................... 114

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools .................................. 1161. General Features 1/4 ............................................................................. 116

1. General Features 2/4 ............................................................................. 117

1. General Features 3/4 ............................................................................. 118

1. General Features 4/4 ............................................................................. 119

2. Adjust Image 1/3 .................................................................................... 121

2. Adjust Image 2/3 .................................................................................... 122

3. Input/Output 1/2 ..................................................................................... 124

3. Input/Output 2/2 ..................................................................................... 125

4 Stamp Setting 1/3 ................................................................................... 125

4 Stamp Setting 2/3 ................................................................................... 126

4 Stamp Setting 3/3 ................................................................................... 127

vii

Page 12: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

viii

5.Remarks

Do's and Don'ts ..................................................................................... 129

Where to Put Your Machine.................................................................. 130Machine Environment ............................................................................... 130Power Connection..................................................................................... 131Access to Machine .................................................................................... 131

Maintaining Your Machine.................................................................... 132Cleaning the Exposure Glass.................................................................... 132Cleaning the Platen Cover ........................................................................ 132Cleaning the Document Feeder ................................................................ 132

6.Specification

Mainframe............................................................................................... 133

Document Feeder (Option) ................................................................... 137

Paper Tray Unit (Option) ....................................................................... 138

Internal Tray 2 (1bin tray) (Option)....................................................... 139

Finisher (Option).................................................................................... 140

Shift Sort Tray (Option)......................................................................... 141

Large Capacity Tray (LCT) (Option)..................................................... 142

Duplex Unit (Option).............................................................................. 143

Bypass Tray (Option) ............................................................................ 144

48MB Copier Memory Unit (Option)..................................................... 145

INDEX...................................................................................................... 146

Page 13: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

This page is intentionally blank.

1

Page 14: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

2

What You Can do with this Machine (Copy Mode)

Page 15: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

3

Page 16: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

4

Machine Types

This machine comes in two models which vary in copy speed. To make surewhich model you have, see the inside front cover.

Type 1 Type 2

Copy speed 22 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)

27 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)

Fax unit Option Option

Printer unit Option Option

Page 17: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Guide to Components

1. Platen cover (option) or documentfeeder (ADF) (option)Lower the platen cover over originalsplaced on the exposure glass for copying.If you have the document feeder, insert astack of originals here. They will be fedautomatically.(The illustration shows the documentfeeder.)

2. Exposure glassPosition originals here face down forcopying. See ⇒ P.16 “Originals”.

3. Internal trayCopied paper is delivered here facedown.

4. Ventilation holePrevents overheating. Do not obstructthe ventilation hole by placing or leaningan object near it. If the machine over-heats, a fault might occur.

5. Main power switchPress this switch to turn the power on oroff.This switch should only be used by a ser-vice representative.

Note❒ If the machine does not operate after

turning on the operation switch, checkif the main power switch is turned on.If it is off, turn it on.

6. Behind coverFlip up when you use the keys under-neath.

5

Page 18: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

6

7. Main Power indicator This indicator lights up when the mainpower switch is turned on, and goes offwhen the switch is turned off.

8. On indicator This indicator lights up when the opera-tion switch is turned on, and goes offwhen the switch is turned off.

9. Operation switchPress this switch to turn the power on(the On indicator lights up). To turn thepower off, press this switch again (the Onindicator goes off).

10. Operation panelSee ⇒ P.8 “Operation Panel”.

11. Front coverOpen to access the inside of the machine.

12. Paper traySet paper here. See ⇒ P.89 “B Loading Pa-per”.

13. Paper tray unit (option)

1. Bypass tray (option)Use to copy onto OHP transparencies,adhesive labels, translucent paper, postcards, and non-standard size paper. See⇒ P.41 “Copying from the Bypass Tray”.

2. Paper tray coverOpen this cover to remove jammed paperfed from the optional paper tray unit.

3. Lower right coverOpen this cover to remove jammed pa-per.

Page 19: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Options

1. FinisherSorts, stacks, and staples copies.

2. Bridge unitRelays copies to the finisher.

3. Platen coverLower this cover over originals for copy-ing.

4. Document feeder (ADF)Insert a stack of originals here.They will be fed automatically.

5. Internal tray 2 (1 bin tray) (Op-tional Interchange unit required.)If you selected this as the output tray,copied paper is delivered here facedown. See “15. Output Tray ” in the Sys-tem Settings.

6. Shift sort traySorts and Stacks copies.

7. Paper tray unitConsists of two paper trays.

8. Large capacity tray (LCT)Holds 2,000 sheets of paper.

9. Bypass trayUse to copy onto OHP transparencies,adhesive labels, translucent paper, postcards, and non-standard size paper. See⇒ P.41 “Copying from the Bypass Tray”.

10. Duplex unit (Optional Inter-change unit required.)Use to make two-sided copies.

Other options:• Interchange unit• 48MB copier memory unit

7

Page 20: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

8

Operation Panel

❖ Copier only

❖ Fax or printer installed

1. {User Tools/Counter } keyPress to change the default settings andconditions to meet your requirements.See ⇒ P.111 “User Tools (Copy Features)”.

2. Keys and indicators for fax mode(for machines with the optional faxfunction)See the “Fax Reference”.

3. IndicatorsThese indicators show errors or the statusof the machine. See ⇒ P.83 “What to do IfSomething Goes Wrong”.

4. More indicators for fax mode (formachines with the optional fax func-tion)See the “Facsimile Reference”.

5. [Sort/Staple ] keySort/Rotate Sort/Shift Sort: automatical-ly sorts copies.Shift Stack: stacks together copies of eachpage.Staple: staples each set of copies together.

6. [Duplex ] keyMakes two-sided copies. See ⇒ P.64 “Du-plex—Making Two-Sided Copies”.

Page 21: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

7. [Reduce/Enlarge ] keyPress to make reduced or enlarged cop-ies. See ⇒ P.50 “Preset Reduce/Enlarge—Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset Ra-tios”.

8. Panel displayShows operation status, error messages,and function menu. See ⇒ P.11 “PanelDisplay”.

9. [Auto R/E ] keyEnlarges or reduces the image automati-cally according to the specified papersize.

10. [Full Size ] keyFor making full size copies.

11.01 keys (Cursor keys)Press to select an item on the panel dis-play.

12. {Check Modes } keyPress to check the entered copy job set-tings.

13. {Program } keyPress to select the program mode. See ⇒P.45 “Program—Storing Your Copy Set-tings in Memory”.

14. {Clear Modes } keyPress to clear the previously entered copyjob settings.

15. {Energy Saver } keyPress to switch to and from Energy Savermode. See ⇒ P.47 “Energy Saver Mode—Saving Energy”.

16. {Interrupt } keyPress to make interrupt copies during acopy run. See ⇒ P.47 “Interrupt—Tempo-rarily Stopping One Job to Copy SomethingElse”.

17. {Positive/Negative }, {Repeat},{Overlay } key• Positive/Negative

Press to make positive/negative cop-ies. See ⇒ P.71 “Positive/Negative—Copying in Complementary Colors”.

• RepeatPress to make repeat copies. See ⇒P.72 “Repeat Image—Repeating an Im-age over the Entire Copy”.

• OverlayPress to make overlay image copies.See ⇒ P.73 “Merging Images (Over-lay)—Merging Two Different Origi-nals”.

18. {Cover/OHP Slip Sheet } key• Cover

Press to add or insert cover paper. See⇒ P.68 “Cover—Adding or InsertingSheets” .

• OHP Slip SheetPress to make copies or insert slipsheets. See ⇒ P.70 “OHP Slip Sheet—Copying or Inserting Slip Sheets” .

19. { Center/Border Erase }keyPress to erase the center and /or all foursides of the original image. See ⇒ P.56“Center/Border Erase—Erasing the Centerand the Border”.

20. {Stamp} keyPress to have a stamp mark printed oncopies. See ⇒ P.75 “Preset Stamp—Print-ing Preset Messages on Your Copies” and ⇒P.78 “Page Numbering—Printing PageNumbers”.

21. {Combine/Series } key• Combine

Press to make combine copies. See ⇒P.58 “Combine—Combining Originalsinto One Copy”.

• SeriesPress to make series copies. See ⇒P.62 “Series Copies—Making One-sidedCopies from Various Originals”.

22. { D. Size Mag. (inch) } keyPress to make Directional Size Magnifica-tion copies. See ⇒ P.53 “Directional SizeMagnification (inch)—Stretching andSqueezing the Image into the Copy Area”.

23. {Direct. Mag.(%) } keyPress to make Directional Magnificationcopies. See ⇒ P.55 “Directional Magnifica-tion (%)—Stretching and Squeezing the Im-age in 1% Steps”.

9

Page 22: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

10

24. {Zoom } keyChanges the reproduction ratio in 1%steps.

25. {Original Type } keyPress to select the type of your originals.

26. {Lighter } key and {Darker} keysand {Auto Image Density } keyAdjusts the copy image density.

27. Operation panel for facsimilemode (for machines with the option-al fax function)See the “Facsimile Reference”.

28. Number keysUse to enter the desired number of copiesand data for selected modes.

29. {Clear/Stop } keyWhile entering numbers, press to cancel anumber you have entered. While copy-ing, press to stop copying.

30. {Start} keyPress to start copying. Also use to initiateAuto Start. See ⇒ P.48 “Auto Start—En-tering Copy Job Settings During the Warm-up Period”

31. Function keys (Fax or printer in-stalled machine only)Press to change modes. To use copy func-tions, press the {Copy} key.

32. Main Power indicatorThis indicator lights up when the mainpower switch is turned on, and goes offwhen the main power switch is turnedoff.

33. On indicatorThis indicator lights up when the opera-tion switch is turned on, and goes offwhen the operation switch is turned off.

34. Operation switchPress this switch to turn the power on(the On indicator lights up). To turn thepower off, press this switch again (the Onindicator goes off).

Page 23: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Panel Display

The panel display shows operational status, error messages, and functionmenus.

Important❒ Do not apply a strong shock or force of about 30N (about 3kgf) or more to the

panel display. Otherwise, the display might be damaged.

Note❒ Currently selected items are displayed white on black (e. g. ).❒ Keys that are displayed grayed-out (e. g. ) can not be used.❒ By default, the machine is in Copy mode when you switch on. This can be

changed. See “Settings You Can Change With The User Tools” of the SystemSettings.

Displays and Key Operations

❖ Copy display

1. The machine status and messagesappear here.

2. Items which can be selected orspecified.

3. Number of copies set.

4. Press these keys to select an item.

5. Settings for this function.

6. Press these keys to select or con-firm settings.

11

Page 24: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

12

❖ Common keys

[OK] Sets a selected function or entered value and returns to the previ-ous display.

[Cancel ] Cancels a selected function or entered value and returns to the previous display.

[↑Prev. ] [↓Next] When there are too many items fit on the display, use these keys to move between pages.

01 Press to highlight the selection you wish to select.

[PrevMenu ] Press to return to the previous menu.

[Exit ] Sets a selected function or entered value and returns to the initial display.

Page 25: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

1. Basics

13

Starting the Machine

To start the machine, turn on the mainpower switch (copier only) or the op-eration switch (fax or printer installedmachine).

Note❒ This machine automatically enters

Energy Saver mode or turns itselfoff if you do not use the machinefor a while. See “07. Energy SaverLevel”, “06. Panel Off Timer”, “09.Auto Off Timer” in the System Set-tings Reference.

-Power switches for fax or printer installed machine

This machine has two power switch-es: See ⇒ P.5 “Guide to Components”.

❖ Operation switch (right side of the op-eration panel)Turn on this switch to activate themachine. When the machine haswarmed up, you can make copiesor send faxes.

❖ Main power switch (front of the ma-chine)Do not touch the main powerswitch. It should be used only by aservice representative when theoptional fax unit is installed.

Important❒ If you leave the main power switch

off for more than about one hour,all fax files in memory will be lost.See “Turning off the Power” in theFacsimile Reference.

Turning on the Power

Starting the Machine

AMake sure that the power cord isplugged into the wall outlet firm-ly.

B Open the switch cover and turnon the main power switch.

C If the On indicator goes off, pressthe operation switch to make theOn indicator light up.

The panel display will come on.

Page 26: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Basics

14

1

Note❒ If the power is not turned on

when the operation switch ispressed, check if the main pow-er switch is on. If off, turn it on.

❒ During the warm-up period,you can use the Auto Start func-tion. See ⇒ P.48 “Auto Start—Entering Copy Job Settings Dur-ing the Warm-up Period”.

❒ Warm-up period is 45 seconds.

When the machine is set for user codes

A Enter your user code using theNumber keys. Then press the {#}key.

Note❒ To prevent others from making

copies with your user code,press the {Clear Modes } key andthe {Clear/Stop } key simulta-neously after copying.

ReferenceFor how to set user codes, see ⇒P.119 “1. General Features 4/4”.

When the {Energy Saver } indicator is lit

The machine is in Energy Savermode.

A Press the {Energy Saver } key.

The machine will return to theready condition.

Note❒ The machine will also return to

the ready condition when anoriginal is set in the documentfeeder, or when the platen coveror document feeder is opened.

ReferenceSee “06. Panel Off Timer” in theSystem Settings Reference.

Turning off the Power

Important❒ If you wish to unplug the power

cord or turn off the main powerswitch, make sure that the remain-ing memory space indicates 100%on the display for fax mode.

❒ Fax files stored in memory will belost an hour after you turn themain power switch off or you un-plug the power cord. See “Turningoff the Power” in the Fax Refer-ence.

A Press the operation switch tomake the On indicator go off.

Page 27: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Changing Modes

1

Changing Modes

You can use this machine not only as a copier, but optionally as a fax machine ora printer as well. Press the {Copy} key to use copy functions, or press the {Fac-simile } key to use facsimile functions.If the display shows a mode other than copy mode, press the {Copy} key toswitch to copy mode.For how to change the mode the machine starts in when you turn the operationswitch on, see “01. Function Priority” in the System Settings Reference.

Limitation❒ You cannot switch modes in any of the following cases:

• When scanning in a fax message for transmission.• During immediate transmission.• When accessing the user tools.• During interrupt copying.• During on hook dialing for fax transmission.• During Energy Saver mode.• When the fax handset is lifted.• While scanning in a document with the scan feature.

15

Page 28: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Basics

16

1

Originals

Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals

❖ Metric version

❖ Inch version

Non-recommended originals for the document feeder

Setting the following originals in the document feeder might cause paper mis-feeds or damage to the originals. Set these originals on the exposure glass.• Originals other than those specified in ⇒ P.16 “Sizes and Weights of Recom-

mended Originals” • Stapled or clipped originals• Perforated or torn originals• Curled, folded, or creased originals• Pasted originals• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, alu-

minum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts• Sticky originals such as translucent paper• Thin originals that have low stiffness• Originals of inappropriate weight ⇒ P.16 “Sizes and Weights of Recommended

Originals” • Bound originals such as books• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper

Where original is set Original Size Original Weight

Exposure glass Up to A3 --

Document feeder 1-sided originals:

A3L – A5KL40 – 128g/m2

2-sided originals:

A3L – A5KL52 – 105g/m2

Where original is set Original Size Original Weight

Exposure glass Up to 11" × 17" --

1-sided originals: 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL

11 – 34 lb

2-sided originals: 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL

14 – 28 lb

Page 29: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Originals

1

Sizes Difficult to Detect

It is difficult for the machine to detect the sizes of the following originals, so se-lect the paper size manually.• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper• Dark originals with many letters and drawings• Originals which partially contain solid images• Originals which have solid images at their edges• Originals other than those (marked by ❍) in the table below. See ⇒ P.17 “Sizes

detectable by the Auto Paper Select”.

Sizes detectable by the Auto Paper Select

❖ Metric version

❖ Inch version

Size A3L

B4JISL

A4K

L

B5JISK

L

A5K

L

11" × 17"L

81/2" × 14"L

81/2" × 11"KL

51/2" × 81/2"KL

81/2" × 13"LWhere setting

original

Exposure glass ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍ × × ❍

Document feeder ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × × × ❍

Size A3L

B4JISL

A4K

L

B5JISK

L

A5K

L

11" × 17"L

81/2"×14"L

81/2"×11"KL

51/2" ×81/2"KL

81/2" ×13"L

10" × 8"K

10" × 14"L

Where setting original

Exposure glass × × × × × ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍

Document feeder × × × × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ❍

17

Page 30: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Basics

18

1

Original Sizes and Scanning Area/Missing Image Area

❖ Exposure glass

❖ Document feeder

Limitation❒ Even if you correctly set originals in the document feeder or on the exposure

glass, 3mm, 0.1" margins on all four sides might not be copied.

A3

A3A4

Horizontal size

Vertical size

Referenceposition

Maximum Scanning areaA3 (297x420mm)11"x17" (279x432mm)

CP01AEE

Page 31: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copy Paper

1

Copy Paper

Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

The following limitations apply to each tray:

Metric version Inch version Paper weight

Paper ca-pacity

Tray 1 A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"L, 71/4" × 101/2"KL, 8" × 13"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/4" × 13"L, 8" × 10"KL, 10" × 14"L

Note❒ You have to specify the paper size

with the user tools. See ⇒ P.103 “Changing the Paper Size”.

60 – 105g/m2, 16 – 28 lb

500 sheets *1

Paper tray unit

(option)

Tray 2 A3L , B4JISL , A4KL , B5JISKL , A5L , B6JISL *2 , A6L ,37/8" × 71/2"L, 41/8" × 91/2"L, 11" × 17"L , 81/2" × 14" L, 81/2" × 11" KL, 81/2" × 51/2"L, 101/2" × 71/4"KL, 8" × 13"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/4" × 13"L, 8" × 10"KL, 10" × 14"L, 8KL *3 , 16KKL *4

, C5 Env.L, C6 Env.L, DL Env.L

Note❒ You have to specify the paper size

with the user tools. See ⇒ P.103 “Changing the Paper Size”.

60 – 105g/m2, 16 – 28 lb

500 sheets *1

Tray 2

Non-stan-dard sizes

A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5L, B6L, A6L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 81/2" × 51/2"L, 101/2" × 71/4"KL, 8" × 13"L, 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13"L, 8" × 10"KL

60 – 157g/m2, 16 – 42 lb

*5

Translucent paper (A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL

OHP transparencies (A4KL)

Adhesive lebels (B4JISL, A4L)

19

Page 32: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Basics

20

1

By-pass tray (op-tion)

Standard Sizes

A3L , B4JISL 60 – 105g/m2, 16 – 28 lb

10 sheets *1

A4KL, B5JISKL, A5L, B6JISL

A4KL, B5JISKL, A5L, B6JISL

100 sheets *1

*2 A6L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 81/2" × 51/2"L, 101/2" × 71/4"KL, 8" × 13"(F)L, 81/2" × 13"(F4)L, 81/4" × 13"L, 8" ×10"KL, 10" × 14"L

*2 A6L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 81/2" × 51/2"L, 101/2" × 71/4"KL, 8" × 13"(F)L, 81/2" × 13"(F4)L, 81/4" × 13"L, 8" ×10"KL, 10" × 14"L, 37/8" × 71/2"L, 41/8" × 91/2"L, C5 Env.L, C6 Env.L, DL Env.L

*2 11" × 15"L, 11" × 14"L, 10" × 15"L, 81/4" × 14"L, 8" × 101/2"KL

*2 11" × 15"L, 11" × 14"L, 10" × 15"L, 81/4" × 14"L, 8" × 101/2"KL

A3L, B4JISL 60 – 157g/m2, 16 – 42 lb

10 sheets *1

A4KL, B5JISKL, A5L, B6JISL 40 sheets *1

A6L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 81/2" × 51/2"L, 101/2" × 71/4"KL, 8" × 13"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/4" × 13"L, 8" × 10"L

Note❒ You have to specify the paper size

with the user tools. See ⇒ P.103 “Changing the Paper Size”.

Non-stan-dard sizes *6

Translucent paper (A3L , B4JISL ), OHP transparencies

10 sheets *1

Translucent paper (A4KL, B5JISKL ), postcards

40 sheets *1

Adhesive labels (B4JISL, A4L) 1 sheets *1

Metric version Inch version Paper weight

Paper ca-pacity

Page 33: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copy Paper

1

*1 Paper weight: 20 lb, 64g/m 2 *2 When you set non-standard size paper in the bypass tray, you have to specify the

size. See ⇒ P.41 “Copying from the Bypass Tray”.*3 8K(Ba-Kai) = 267 × 390 mm, 10.6" × 15.4"*4 16K(Shi-Lui-Kai) = 195 × 267 mm, 7.7" × 10.6"*5 Do not stack copy paper above the Tray 2 lower limit mark. See ⇒ P.105 “Changing

the Paper Size in Tray 2”.*6 Always set one sheet at a time. See ⇒ P.41 “Copying from the Bypass Tray”.

Important❒ If you use damp or curled paper, a misfeed might occur. In such a case, try

turning over the paper stack in the paper tray. If there is no improvement,change to copy paper with less curl.

Note❒ When you use the bypass tray, it is recommended to set the copy paper direc-

tion to L.❒ When you use the color paper, set it in the tray 2. Do not stack the paper above

the lower limit mark of the tray 2.❒ Postcards should be fed from the bypass tray.❒ If you load paper of the same size and in the same direction in two or more

trays, the machine automatically shifts to another tray when the tray in useruns out of paper. This function is called Auto Tray Switch. (If you put recy-cled paper in paper trays using the Special Paper Indicate menu, this functionis not available with these trays unless their settings are identical.) This savesinterrupting a copy run to replenish paper even when you make a large num-ber of copies. You can cancel this setting. See “13. Auto Tray Switch” and “14.Special Pap. Indict” of the System Settings.

ReferenceIf you want to add paper, see ⇒ P.89 “B Loading Paper”.If you want to change the paper size, see ⇒ P.103 “Changing the Paper Size”.

Large capacity tray

(option)

A4K 81/2" × 11"K 60 – 105g/m2, 16 – 28 lb

2,000 sheets *1

Metric version Inch version Paper weight

Paper ca-pacity

21

Page 34: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Basics

22

1

Non-recommended Paper

R CAUTION:

Important❒ Do not use paper with any kind of coating such as:

• Thermal fax paper• Art paper• Aluminum foil• Carbon paper• Conductive paper

❒ Otherwise, a fault might occur.❒ Do not use copy paper that has been already copied on. Otherwise, a fault

might occur.

Note❒ Do not use the following type of paper because a paper misfeed might occur.

• Bent, folded, or creased paper• Torn paper• Slippery paper• Perforated paper• Rough paper• Thin paper that has low stiffness• Paper with much paper dust on its surface

❒ If you make copies on rough grain paper, the copy image might be blurred.❒ Do not use paper which has been copied or printed on.

Paper Storage

Note❒ When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:

• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.• Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70% or less).• Store on a flat surface.

❒ Keep open reams of papers in the package, and store as you would unopenedpaper.

❒ Under high temperature and high humidity, or low temperature and low hu-midity conditions, store papers in a vinyl bag.

• Do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive paper to avoid a fire or equipment failure.

Page 35: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Toner

1

Toner

Handling Toner

R WARNING:

R CAUTION:

R CAUTION:

Important❒ If you use toner other than that recommended, a fault might occur.

ReferenceIf you want to add toner, see ⇒ P.91 “D Changing the Toner Bottle”.

Toner Storage

Note❒ When storing toner, the following precautions should always be followed:

• Store toner containers in a cool, dry place free from direct sunlight.• Do not store toner where it will be exposed to heat.• Do not eat or swallow toner, and keep it out of reach of children.• Store on a flat surface.

• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ig-nite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner containers in accordance with local regulations for plastics.

• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.

• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-ality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies avail-able at an authorized dealer.

23

Page 36: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Basics

24

1

Photo Conductor Unit (PCU)

Handling Photo Conductor Unit

R WARNING:

Photo Conductor Unit Storage

R CAUTION:

Note❒ When storing photo couductor units, the following precautions should al-

ways be followed: • Store PCU in a cool, dark place free from direct sunlight.• Do not store PCU in a wet place.• Follow the instructions on the carton box of PCU

Replacing Photo Conductor Unit

ReferenceSee ⇒ P.93 “Replacing Photo Conductor Unit (PCU)”

• Do not incinerate the photoconductor unit. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of the used photoconductor unit in accordance with local regulations for plastics.

• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-ality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies avail-able at an authorized dealer.

Page 37: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

2. Copying

Basic Procedure

AWhen the machine is set for usercodes, enter the user code withthe Number keys and then pressthe {#} key.

ReferenceSee ⇒ P.48 “User Codes”.

BMake sure that the machine is inCopy mode.

Note❒ If not, press the {Copy } key.

CMake sure that there are no previ-ous settings remaining.

Note❒ To clear settings, press the{Clear Modes } key.

D Set your originals.

ReferenceSee ⇒ P.27 “Setting Originals”.

E Set your desired settings.

F Enter the number of copies re-quired with the Number keys.

Note❒ The maximum copy quantity

can be set between 1 and 99 (de-fault: 99 ). See “05. Max. CopyQ'ty” in ⇒ P.117 “1. General Fea-tures 2/4”.

❒ To change the number entered,press the {Clear/Stop } key andenter the new number.

G Press the {Start} key.The machine starts copying.

Note❒ To stop the machine during the

multi-copy run, press the {Clear/Stop} key.

❒ To return the machine to the ini-tial condition after copying,press the {Clear Modes } key.

25

Page 38: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

26

2

-System ResetThe machine returns to its initial con-dition automatically after your job isfinished, after a certain period oftime. This function is called “SystemReset”.

Note❒ You can change the System Reset

time. See “04. System Reset” in theSystem Settings Reference.

-Auto OffThe machine turns itself off automat-ically after your job is finished, after acertain period of time. This function iscalled “Auto Off”.

Note❒ How to exit Auto Off mode de-

pends on your machine configura-tion:• Press the operation switch

❒ You can change the Auto Off time.See “09. Auto Off Timer” in theSystem Settings.

❒ You can change the default set-tings for basic functions. See ⇒P.116 “Settings You Can Changewith the User Tools” and “UserTools (System Settings)” in theSystem Settings Reference.

Page 39: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Setting Originals

2

Setting Originals

Note❒ Basically the originals should be

aligned to the rear left corner.However, some copy functionsmay produce different results de-pending on the direction of theoriginals. For details, see explana-tions of each function.

ReferenceSee ⇒ P.16 “Originals”.

Setting Originals on the Exposure Glass

A Lift the platen cover or the docu-ment feeder.

Note❒ Be sure to open the platen cover

or the document feeder by morethan 30°, otherwise the originalsize might not be detected cor-rectly.

B Set the original face down on theexposure glass. The originalshould be aligned to the rear leftcorner.

1: Reference mark2: Scale

C Lower the platen cover or the doc-ument feeder.

Setting Originals in the Document Feeder

Note❒ The original might become dirty if

it is written with a pencil or similartools.

❒ You cannot set a multi-page origi-nal with pages of different sizes inthe document feeder. If your origi-nal contains pages of different siz-es, use the SADF function and seteach page one at a time. Alterna-tively, set pages one at a time onthe exposure glass.

❒ Do not place any foreign objects onthe document feeder or cover itwith your hand. This could causethe size not to be detected proper-ly.

Originals Set in the document feeder

Set on the exposure glass

27

Page 40: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

28

2

1: Sensor

ReferenceRegarding originals that the docu-ment feeder can handle, see ⇒ P.16“Originals”.

Setting a stack of originals in the document feeder

A Adjust the guide to the originalsize.

B Set the aligned originals face upinto the document feeder.

1: Limit mark2: Document guide

Note❒ Do not stack originals above the

limit mark.❒ To avoid a multi-sheet feed,

shuffle the originals before set-ting them in the document feed-er.

When SADF mode is selected

A Set one original face up into thedocument feeder. Then press the{Start} key.The Auto Feed indicator is shownon the display.

BWhen the machine instructs youto set another original, set thenext page.

The second and subsequent origi-nals can be fed automatically with-out pressing the {Start} key.

Note❒ You can adjust the time the ma-

chine waits before being readyfor the next original. See “04.SADF Auto Reset” in ⇒ P.124“3. Input/Output 1/2”.

Page 41: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Setting Originals

2

Setting Non-Mstandard Sized Originals in the Document Feeder

Limitation❒ Enter the size of your original if it

is not one of the following: A3 L,B4JISL, A4KL, B5JIS KL,A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL

❒ The paper size that can be set withthis function is vertical 105–297mm (4" × 11"), horizontal 128-1,260mm (5" × 49").

❒ The maximum copy paper size is297 × 432mm (11" × 17").

❒ You cannot use the Auto Paper Se-lect function with this function.

A Set one original face up into thedocument feeder.

B Press the 1 key to select your de-sired paper tray or bypass tray.

C Press the {#} key.

Note❒ When you select the paper tray,

go to step E.

D If you select the bypass tray instep B, press the [Orig. Size ] key.

E Enter the horizontal size of theoriginal with the Number keys,then press the {#} key.

F Enter the vertical size of the origi-nal with the Number keys, thenpress the [OK] key.

G Press the {Start} key.

29

Page 42: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

30

2

Basic Functions

The following basic functions are ex-plained in this section.

❖ Adjusting Copy Image DensityAuto and Manual Image Density

❖ Selecting the Original TypeText, Text·Photo, Photo

❖ Selecting the Copy PaperAuto Paper Select and Manual Pa-per Select

❖ Auto Reduce/EnlargeThe machine can choose an appro-priate reproduction ratio based onthe paper and original sizes you se-lect.

Note❒ You can select functions to be acti-

vated when System Reset is turnedon, when Energy Saver is turnedoff, or after the machine is pow-ered on. See ⇒ P.116 “1. GeneralFeatures 1/4”.

❒ You can change default settings forbasic functions. See ⇒ P.116 “Set-tings You Can Change with the UserTools”.

Adjusting Copy Image Density

You can adjust the copy image densi-ty to match your originals.There are three ways to specify imagedensity:

❖ Auto Image DensityThe machine automatically adjuststhe image density.

❖ Manual Image DensityIf you require darker or lightercopies, adjust the image densityyourself.

❖ Combined Auto and Manual ImageDensityUse when copying originals with adirty background (such as news-papers). You can adjust the fore-ground density while leaving thebackground unchanged.

ReferenceYou can change the density levelwith the user tools. See “10. TextDensity” in ⇒ P.118 “1. GeneralFeatures 3/4”.

A Select one of the Image Densitymodes.

Auto Image Density

AMake sure that the Auto ImageDensity indicator is lit.

Note❒ If it is not, press the {Auto Im-

age Density } key.

Manual Image Density

A Press the {Auto Image Density }key so the indicator goes out.

Page 43: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Basic Functions

2

B Press the {Lighter } or {Darker}key to adjust the image densi-ty.

Combined Auto and Manual Image Density

AMake sure that the Auto ImageDensity indicator is lit.

B Press the {Lighter } or {Darker}key to adjust the density.

Selecting Your Original Type

Select one of the following types tomatch your originals:

❖ TextIf you do not select any mode, youroriginals will be scanned with thesettings suitable for text originals(Text mode).

❖ Text·PhotoSelect Text·Photo when your origi-nals contains photographs or pic-tures with letters.

❖ PhotoDelicate tones of photographs andpictures can be reproduced withthis mode.

A Press the {Original Type } key andselect the original type.

Note❒ Press the {Original Type } key to

step through the followingtypes:

Selecting Copy Paper

There are two ways to select copy pa-per:

❖ Auto Paper SelectThe machine selects a suitable sizeof copy paper automatically basedon the original size and the repro-duction ratio.

Note❒ When the original is set at a dif-

ferent direction from the copypaper in the paper tray the ma-chine automatically rotates theoriginal image by 90° to matchthe copy paper direction. Thisapplies to the following papersizes:

No indicator lit Text

Upper indicator lit Text·Photo

Lower indicator lit Photo

Metric ver-sion

A4 KL, B5JIS KL

Inch ver-sion

81/2" × 11" KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL (document feeder)

31

Page 44: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

32

2

❖ Manual Paper SelectYou can select the desired copy pa-per size manually. You can also se-lect the bypass tray.

ReferenceSee ⇒ P.41 “Copying from the By-pass Tray”.

Note❒ When you use Auto Paper Select,

refer to the following table for pos-sible copy paper sizes and direc-tions (if the ratio is 100%).

❖ Metric version

❖ Inch version

❒ For some originals, the originalsize might not be detected correct-ly. See ⇒ P.17 “Sizes Difficult to De-tect”.

❒ When you set special paper in thepaper tray, you can have the kindof paper shown on the display. See“14. Special Pap. Indict” of the Sys-tem Settings.

❒ If a paper tray has been specifiedas containing special paper, AutoPaper Select cannot use it. See “14.Special Pap. Indict”.

❒ If you specify all papers trays ascontaining special paper you can-not use Auto Paper Select.

❒ If you set the all paper tray to spe-cial paper, you cannot use theAuto Paper Select function.

A Select the copy paper.

Auto Paper Select

AMake sure that Auto (Auto Pa-per Select) is selected.

Manual Paper Select

A Select the paper tray or bypasstray by pressing the 01 keys.

Where original is set Paper size and direction

Exposure glass

A3 L, B4JIS L, A4 KL, B5JIS KL, 81/2" × 13" L, 81/2" × 14" L

Document feeder

A3 L, B4JIS L, A4 KL, B5JIS KL, A5 KL, 81/2" × 13"L

Where original is set Paper size and direction

Exposure glass

11" × 17" L, 81/2" × 14" L, 81/2" × 11" KL, 81/2" × 13" L, 10" × 14" L, 8" × 10" K

Document feeder

11" × 17" L, 81/2" × 14" L, 81/2" × 11" KL, 51/2" × 81/2" KL

Page 45: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Basic Functions

2

-Rotate CopyIf the direction in which your originalis set (landscape or portrait) is differ-ent from the paper you are copyingonto, this function rotates the originalimage by 90° and fits it on the copypaper. This function works whenAuto Paper Select or Auto Reduce/Enlarge are selected. See “Auto PaperSelect” in ⇒ P.31 “Selecting Copy Pa-per” and ⇒ P.33 “Auto Reduce/En-large—Having the Machine Choose theReproduction Ratios”.

Limitation❒ You cannot use the Rotated Copy

function when enlarging ontoB4JIS or A3 size paper. In this case,set your original in the landscapedirection.

❒ You cannot use the Rotated Copyfunction when Staple function isselected. See ⇒ P.38 “Staple”.

Auto Reduce/Enlarge—Having the Machine Choose the Reproduction Ratios

The machine can choose an appropri-ate reproduction ratio based on thepaper and original sizes you select.

Limitation❒ You cannot use the bypass tray

with this function.

Note❒ When you use Auto Reduce/En-

large, refer to the following tablefor possible original sizes and di-rections:

Original orientation

Paper ori-entation

Rotates the image and copies it

You cannot rotate:

However, you can ro-tate:

Original Size and Direction

A4, B5JIS, or A5 portrait

A4, B5JIS, or A5 land-scape

↓ when en-larging to

↓ when en-larging to

GCROTA0E

R

R

Copy pa-per Size and Di-rection

B4JIS, A3 B4JIS, A3

33

Page 46: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

34

2

❖ Metric version

❖ Inch version

❒ The machine will choose a repro-duction ratio in the range 25–400%.

❒ When you set the originals in thedocument feeder, you can changethe reproduction ratio from 50–200%.

❒ For some originals, the originalsize might not be detected correct-ly. See ⇒ P.17 “Sizes Difficult to De-tect”.

A Press the [Auto R/E ] key.

B Select the paper tray by pressingthe 01 keys.Where

original is set

Original size and direc-tion

Exposure glass

A3 L, B4JIS L, A4 KL, B5JIS KL, 81/2" × 13" L, 81/2" × 14" L

Document feeder

A3 L, B4JIS L, A4 KL, B5JIS KL, A5 KL, 81/2" × 13"L

Where original is set

Original size and direc-tion

Exposure glass

11" × 17" L, 81/2" × 14" L, 81/2" × 11" KL, 81/2" × 13" L

Document feeder

11" × 17" L, 81/2" × 14" L, 81/2" × 11" KL, 51/2" × 81/2" KL

Page 47: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Sort/Stack/Staple

2

Sort/Stack/Staple

The machine can scan your originalsinto memory and automatically sortthe copies.

❖ Sort• Sort• Rotate Sort• Shift Sort (the optional finisher

required or shift sort tray)

❖ Stack• Shift Stack (optional finisher re-

quired or shift sort tray)

❖ Staple (the optional finisher required)

Limitation❒ You cannot use the bypass tray

with this function.

Note❒ The maximum tray capacity is as

follows. When the number of cop-ies exceeds the tray capacity, re-move copies from the tray.

❖ Metric version

❖ Inch version

❒ The maximum tray capacity mightbe less than the above when youuse the Rotate Sort, or Staple func-tion.

❒ The maximum tray capacity mightalso be reduced when copy paperis considerably curled.

Sort—Sorting into Sets (123, 123, 123)

Copies can be assembled as sets in se-quential order.

❖ Sort

Internal tray 1 • B4JIS or larger: 250 sheets (80g/m2)

• A4 or smaller: 500 sheets (80g/m2)

Internal tray 1 (with optional shift sort tray)

• B4JIS or larger: 125 sheets (80g/m2)

• A4 or smaller: 250 sheets (80g/m2)

Internal tray 2 125 sheets (80g/m2)

Finisher • B4JIS or larger: 500 sheets (80g/m2)

• A4 or smaller: 1,000 sheets (80g/m2)

Internal tray 1 • 81/2" × 14" or larger: 250 sheets (20 lb)

• 81/2" × 11" or small-er: 500 sheets (20 lb)

Internal tray 1 (with optional shift sort tray)

• 81/2" × 14" or larger: 125 sheets (20 lb)

• 81/2" × 11" or small-er: 250 sheets (20 lb)

Internal tray 2 125 sheets (20 lb)

Finisher • 81/2" × 14" or larger: 500 sheets (20 lb)

• 81/2" × 11" or small-er: 1,000 sheets (20 lb)

21

3 21

3 21

3 21

3

35

Page 48: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

36

2

❖ Rotate Sort

❖ Shift Sort

Three sorting methods are available:

❖ SortCopies can be assembled as sets insequential order.

❖ Rotate SortEvery other copy set is rotated by90°KL and delivered to the copytray.

❖ Shift Sort (optional finisher or shiftsort tray required)Every other copy set is shifted forease of separation. The shift tray ofthe finisher or shift sort tray pro-vides this function by sliding fromside to side.

Note❒ To switch among Sort, Rotate Sort,

and Shift Sort modes, access theuser tools. See “6. Sort” on ⇒ P.125“3. Input/Output 2/2”.

❒ The paper sizes that can be usedwith the Rotate Sort function are asfollows:

❒ To use the Rotate Sort function,two paper trays identical in sizeand different in direction (K L)are required.

❒ The paper sizes that can be used inShift Sort function are as follows:

ReferenceFor the paper capacity of the op-tional finisher, see ⇒ P.38 “Staple”.

A Press the [Sort/Staple ] key.

BMake sure that [Sort ] is se-lected, then press the [OK] key.

C Enter the number of copy setswith the Number keys.

Limitation❒ The maximum number of sets is

99.

D Set your originals.

When setting a stack of originals in the document feeder

A Set a stack of originals in thedocument feeder, then pressthe {Start} key.Metric version A4KLB5JISKL

Inch version 81/2" × 11"KL

21

3 21

3 21

321

3

21

3

321

321

321

1000-sheet finisher

A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, 81/

2" × 13"L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL

Page 49: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Sort/Stack/Staple

2

After all the originals arescanned, the copies are deliv-ered to the tray.

Note❒ If an original is misfed, reset

your originals in the docu-ment feeder according to theinstruction on the display.The display will indicate thenumber of originals youshould return.

When setting an original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder

ReferenceSee ⇒ P.28 “When SADF mode isselected”

A Set the original, then press the{Start} key.

B Set the next original, thenpress the {Start} key.

Note❒ Set the original in the same

direction as the first one.C After all originals are scanned,

press the {#} key.The copies are delivered to thetray.

Stack—Delivering Copies in Page Batches (111, 222, 333)

The optional finisher or shift sort tray isrequired to use this function.

Copies can be assembled with eachpage set.

❖ Shift Stack (optional finisher or shiftsort tray required)Every other page set is shifted forease of separation. The shift tray ofthe finisher or shift sort tray pro-vides this function by sliding fromside to side.

ReferenceFor the maximum tray capacity ofthe optional finisher, see ⇒ P.38“Staple”.

A Press the [Sort/Staple ] key.

B Select the [Stack ] by pressingthe 1 key. Then, press the [OK]key.

C Enter the number of copies withthe Number keys.

D Set your originals.

21

3

333

222

111

37

Page 50: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

38

2

When setting a stack of originals in the document feeder

A Set a stack of originals in thedocument feeder, then pressthe {Start} key.

After all the originals arescanned, the copies are deliv-ered to the tray.

When setting an original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder

A Set the original, then press the{Start} key.

Note❒ Start with the first page to be

copied.B Set the next original, then

press the {Start} key.

Note❒ Set the original in the same

direction as the first one.C After all originals are scanned,

press the {#} key.

The copies are delivered to thetray.

Staple

The optional finisher is required to usethis function.

Each copy set can be stapled together.

Limitation❒ You cannot use the following pa-

per with this function:• Post cards• Translucent paper• OHP transparencies• Adhesive labels• Curled paper• Low stiffness paper• Paper of different sizes

Note❒ See the tables below for allowable

paper sizes and capacities avail-able with this feature. When thenumber of copies exceeds the traycapacity, copying stops. In thiscase, remove the copies from theshift tray and then resume copy-ing.

❒ In the following cases, the copieswill be delivered to the shift traywithout stapling.

1000-sheet finisher

Paper size A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, 8" × 10"KL, 81/2" × 11"KL, 8" × 13"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/4" × 13"L, 10" × 14"L, 11" × 17"L, 8K L, 16K KL

Stapler ca-pacity

• A4, 81/2" × 11" or small-er: 30 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)

• B4JIS, 81/2" × 14" or larger: 20 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)

Shift tray capacity (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)

1,000 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)

Page 51: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Sort/Stack/Staple

2

• When the number of copies forone set is over the stapler capac-ity.

• When memory reaches 0% dur-ing copying.

❒ When you select Staple, Sort modeis automatically selected.

ReferenceIf you want to add staples, see ⇒P.107 “d Adding Staples”.When staples are jammed, see ⇒P.109 “e Removing Jammed Staples”.

-Staple position and original direction

Limitation❒ Original images are not rotated.

Note❒ To staple in combination with

Combine: 2 pages or 4 pages, select L paper for K origi-

nals, or select K paper for L orig-inals.

A Press the [Sort/Staple ] key.

B Press the [Staple ] key, then pressthe [OK] key.

C Enter the number of copy setswith the Number keys.

D Set your originals.

When setting a stack of originals in the document feeder

A Set a stack of originals in thedocument feeder, then pressthe {Start} key.After all the originals arescanned, the copies are deliv-ered to the tray.

When setting an original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder

A Set the original, then press the{Start} key.

B Set the next original, thenpress the {Start} key.

Note❒ Set the original in the same

direction as the first one.C After all originals are scanned,

press the {#} key.

The copies are delivered to thetray.

Original setting Stapling positionExposure

glassDocument Feeder

K

L

39

Page 52: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

40

2

To stop scanning

When you are using the Sort, Stack, orStaple function, the originals arescanned into memory.

A Press the {Clear/Stop } key.

To resume scanning

A Press the {Start} key.Scanning is resumed.

Note❒ Scanned images in memory

are not cleared.

To clear all scanned images

A Press the {Clear Modes } key.

Scanning is stopped and the set-tings are cleared.

When memory reaches 0%

Scanning will be stopped if the size ofscanned image data exceeds memorycapacity.

Note❒ The number of originals that can

be stored in memory varies de-pending on the memory settingand original type.

❒ The maximum number of originalsthat can be stored is about 100 pag-es.

ReferenceFor details, see “08. Print Quality”and “09. Image Adjustment” in ⇒P.117 “1. General Features 2/4”

To copy scanned so far originals

A Press the [Print ] key.The scanned pages are delivered tothe tray then the image data inmemory is cleared.

B Remove the copies and continuecopying by following the instruc-tions on the display.

To cancel the copy operation

A Press the [Clear ] key.

Scanning is stopped and the set-tings are cleared.

Page 53: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying from the Bypass Tray

2

Copying from the Bypass Tray

The optional bypass tray is required to use this function.

Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHPtransparencies, adhesive labels, trans-lucent paper, post cards, and copy pa-per that cannot be set in the papertray.

Note❒ The machine can automatically de-

tect the following sizes as standardsize copy paper:

❒ If you do not use standard sizecopy paper, you should input ver-tical and horizontal dimensions.The sizes that you can input are asfollows:

ReferenceFor details about paper capacity ofthe bypass tray, see ⇒ P.19 “CopyPaper”.

A Open the bypass tray.

B Push up the paper guide releaselever.

1: Paper guide release lever

C Lightly insert the copy paper facedown and adjust the paper guide.

Metric version

A3L, A4L, A5L, 8" × 13"L

Inch version

11" × 17"L, 8 1/2" × 14"L, 8" × 13"L, 81/2" × 11"L, 51/2" × 81/2" L

Metric version

• Vertical: 90 – 305mm

• Horizontal: 148 – 432mm

Inch version

• Vertical: 3.5" – 12"

• Horizontal: 6.0" – 17.0"

41

Page 54: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

42

2

1: Horizontal size2: Vertical size3: Extender4: Paper guide

Important❒ If the guides are not flush with

the copy paper, a skew image orpaper misfeeds might occur.

Note❒ Do not stack paper over the lim-

it mark; otherwise a skew imageor paper misfeeds might occur.

❒ Set the direction of the copy pa-per to L.

❒ Swing out the extender to sup-port larger size copy paper(larger than A4L, 81/2" ×11"L).

❒ Fan paper to get air between thesheets and avoid a multi-sheetfeed.

When copying onto OHP transparencies

A Lightly insert the OHP trans-parencies face up and adjustthe paper guide.

Important❒ The side of OHP transparen-

cies that is copied is fixed. Be-fore you set the OHPtransparencies in the bypasstray, check the cutting posi-tion of the OHP transparen-cies.

D Push down the paper guide re-lease lever.

is selected automatically.

Note❒ If you set A4, 81/2" × 11" or larg-

er copy paper, hold the edge ofthe paper and push down thepaper guide release lever.

❒ If you do not push down the pa-per guide release lever, a mis-feed might occur.

When copying onto non-standard size copy paper

Important❒ You should specify the size of

copy paper to avoid paper mis-feeds.

Page 55: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying from the Bypass Tray

2

A Press the {#} key.

B Press the [Pap.Size] key.

C Select [Custom Size ] key bypressing the 1 key. Then pressthe [OK] key.

D Enter the horizontal size of thepaper with the Number keys,then press the {#} key.

Note❒ To change the number en-

tered, press the {Clear/Stop }key and enter the new num-ber.

E Enter the vertical size of the pa-per with the Number keys,then press the [OK] key.

Note❒ To change the number en-

tered, press the {Clear/Stop }key and enter the new num-ber.

❒ When you copy onto plainpaper, go to step G.

F Press the [Pap.Type ] key whencopying onto thick paper.

G Select [Non Standard ] by press-ing the 1 key. Then press the[OK] key.

H Press the [Exit ] key.

When copying onto non-detected standard size paper

Important❒ You should specify the size of

paper to avoid paper misfeeds.A Press the {#} key.

B Press the [Pap.Size] key.

43

Page 56: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

44

2

C Select the [Std. Size ] by pressingthe 1 key, then press the [Cus-tom ] key.

D Press the [↓Next ] key until yourdesired size is displayed.

E Select the desired size bypressing the 01 keys. Thenpress the [OK] key.

Note❒ When copying onto plain pa-

per, go to step F.F Press the [Pap.Type ] key when

copying onto thick paper.

G Select the [Non Standard ] bypressing the 1key. Then pressthe [OK] key.

Important❒ You should specify the size

of copy paper to avoid papermisfeeds.

E Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

Page 57: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Program—Storing Your Copy Settings in Memory

2

Program—Storing Your Copy Settings in Memory

You can store frequently used copyjob settings in machine memory, andrecall them for future use.

❖ Storing Your SettingsYou can store your settings youfrequently use.

❖ Deleting A ProgramYou can delete a stored program.

❖ Recalling A ProgramYou can recall a stored program.

Note❒ You can store up to ten programs.❒ You can select the standard mode

or program No. 10 as the mode tobe set when modes are cleared, themachine is reset, or immediatelyafter the operation switch is turnedon.

❒ Paper settings are stored based onpaper size. So if you place morethan one paper tray of a same size,the paper tray prioritized with theuser tools will be selected first. See“12. Pap.Tray Priority ” in the Sys-tem Settings Reference.

❒ Programs are not cleared by turn-ing the power off or by pressingthe {Clear Modes } key. They arecanceled only when you delete oroverwrite them with another pro-gram.

Storing a Program

A Edit the copy settings so that allfunctions you want to store in thisprogram are selected.

B Press the {Program } key.

C Press the [Store ] key.

D Select the program number youwant to store these settings inwith the 01 keys. Then pressthe [OK] key.

When the settings are successfullystored, the m symbol appears.

Note❒ Program numbers with m al-

ready have settings in them.❒ If this program number is al-

ready being used, the machinewill ask you if you wish to over-write it - press the [Yes] or [No]key.

45

Page 58: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

46

2

Deleting a Program

You can delete a stored program.

A Press the {Program } key.

B Press the [Delete] key.

C Select the program number youwant to delete with the 01 keys.Then press the [OK] key.

D Press the [Yes] key.

Note❒ To cancel the deletion, press the

[No] key.

E To delete another program, repeatsteps C and D.

F Press the [Exit ] key.

Recalling a Program

You can recall a stored program.

A Press the {Program } key.

B Select the program number youwant to recall with the 01 keys.Then press the [OK] key.

The stored settings are displayed.

Note❒ You can only select program

numbers marked with the msymbol.

C Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

Page 59: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Other Functions

2

Other Functions

Energy Saver Mode—Saving Energy

If you do not operate the machine fora certain period after copying, orwhen you press and hold the {EnergySaver} key for more than one second,the display goes blank and the ma-chine enters Energy Saver mode.When you press the {Energy Saver }key again, when the originals are setin the document feeder, or when theplaten cover or document feeder isopened, the machine returns to theready condition. In Energy Savermode, the machine uses less electrici-ty.Energy Saver mode makes a two-stepreduction in electricity: one for the pe-riod up to the time set for Low Powermode, the other for the period afterthat time.

Note❒ The period for which the machine

remains in Energy Saver mode (i.e.the period until the mode is turnedoff to return to the ready condi-tion) varies with the effectivenessof energy saving.

ReferenceSee “06. Panel Off Timer”, “07. En-ergy Saver Level”, “08. EnergySaver Timer” of the System Set-tings Reference.

Interrupt—Temporarily Stopping One Job to Copy Something Else

You can make urgently needed copiesduring a multi-copy run.

Note❒ The procedure for making inter-

rupt copies depends on whichkind of operation the machine iscurrently carrying out.

While a document is being fed

A Press the {Interrupt } key.The key indicator lights.

B Remove the originals currentlyset for copying, and set your orig-inals for interrupt copying.

ReferenceFor functions that cannot beused together with this func-tion, see ⇒ P.80 “CombinationChart”.

C Press the Start key.

The machine starts making yourcopies.

D After interrupt copying, removethe originals for interrupt copy-ing and the copies.

E Press the {Interrupt } key again.

The key indicator goes off.

F Reset the previous originals.Then press the {Start} key.

47

Page 60: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

48

2

Note❒ The previous copy settings are

recalled and the previous copyjob can be resumed by pressingthe {Start} key.

Interrupting copying after all originals have been fed

A Press the {Interrupt } key.

The Interrupt key lights and copy-ing will stop.

B Set your original.

ReferenceFor functions that cannot beused together with this func-tion, see ⇒ P.80 “CombinationChart”.

C Press the {Start} key.

The machine starts making yourcopies.

DWhen copying is complete, re-move your originals and copies.

E Press the {Interrupt } key again.The Interrupt indicator goes out.

F Press the {Start} key.

The previous copy job settings willbe restored and the machine willcontinue copying from where itleft off.

User Codes

When user codes are turned on, oper-ators must input their user codes be-fore the machine can be operated. Themachine keeps count of the numberof copies made under each user code.

Note❒ When user codes are turned on,

the machine will prompt you foryour user code after the powerswitch is turned on or System Re-set comes into effect.

❒ To prevent others from makingcopies using your user code, pressthe {Clear Modes } and {Clear/Stop }keys simultaneously after copying.

ReferenceFor setting user codes, see ⇒ P.119“1. General Features 4/4”.

Auto Start—Entering Copy Job Settings During the Warm-up Period

If you press the {Start} key during thewarm-up period, the {Start} key willblink and your copies will be made assoon as warm-up finishes.

AMake any adjustments to copysettings during the warm-up peri-od.

B Set your originals.

C Press the {Start} key.

The {Start} key indicator alternate-ly flashes red and green.

Note❒ To cancel Auto Start, press the{Clear/Stop } key.

Page 61: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Other Functions

2

Original Tone

The key tone sounds and an errormessage is displayed when you leaveyour originals on the exposure glassfor about two seconds after copying.

Note❒ To cancel this function, see “06.

Original Tone” on ⇒ P.117 “1. Gen-eral Features 2/4”.

How to Set the Papers with Letterhead

You can make the copies on the pa-pers with letterhead.

When you want to make one sided copies

A Set your original on the exposureglass.

B Set the papers in the tray with thefirst page face-up.

For the orientation, see the illustra-tion below.

When you want to make two sided copies

A Set your original on the exposureglass.

B Store the papers in the tray withthe first page face-down.For the orientation, see the illustra-tion below.

49

Page 62: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

50

2

Preset Reduce/Enlarge—Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset Ratios

You can select a preset ratio for copy-ing.

Note❒ You can select one of 12 preset ra-

tios (5 enlargement ratios, 7 reduc-tion ratios).

❒ You can change the preset ratios toother ratios you frequently use. See“07. Re./En. Priority” in ⇒ P.117“1. General Features 2/4”.

❒ You can select a ratio regardless ofthe size of an original or copy pa-per. With some ratios, parts of theimage might not be copied or mar-gins will appear on copies.

❒ Copies can be reduced or enlargedas follows:

❖ Metric version

*1 When you set the originals in thedocument feeder, you cannot use25% and 400 % ratio.

❖ Inch version

Ratio (%)Original → Copy paper size

400 *1 (enlarge area by 16)

--

200 (enlarge area by 4)

A5→A3

141 (enlarge area by 2)

A4→A3, A5→A4

122 F→A3, A4→B4JIS

115 B4JIS→A3

93 A little reduced.

87 A3→B4JIS

82 F→A4, B4JIS→F

71 (reduce area by 1/2)

A3→A4, A4→A5

65 A3→F

50 (reduce area by 1/4)

A3→A5, F→A5

25 *1 (reduce area by 1/16)

--

Ratio(%) Original → Copy paper size

400 *1 (enlarge area by 16)

--

200 (enlarge area by 4)

51/2" × 81/2"→11" × 17"

155 (enlarge area by 2)

51/2" × 81/2"→81/2" × 14"

129 81/2" × 11"→11" × 17"

121 81/2" × 14"→11" × 17"

93 A little reduced.

85 F→81/2" × 11"

Ratio (%)Original → Copy paper size

Page 63: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Preset Reduce/Enlarge—Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset Ratios

2

*1 When you set the originals in thedocument feeder, you cannot use25% and 400 % ratio.

A Press the [Reduce/Enlarge ] key toselect a ratio.

B Press the [Reduce ] or [Enlarge ] key.

C Select the ratio by pressing the01 keys.

Note❒ The ratio changes everytime

you press the 01 keys.

D Press the [OK] key.

E Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

78 81/2" × 14"→81/2" × 11"

73 11" × 15"→81/2" × 11"

65 11" × 17"→81/2" × 11"

50 (reduce area by 1/4)

11" × 17"→51/2" × 81/2"

25 *1 (reduce area by 1/16)

--

Ratio(%) Original → Copy paper size

51

Page 64: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

52

2

Zoom—Reducing and Enlarging in 1% Steps

You can change the reproduction ra-tio in 1% steps.

Note❒ You can change the reproduction

ratio from 25–400 %.❒ When you set the originals in the

document feeder, you can changethe reproduction ratio from 50–200%.

❒ You can select a ratio regardless ofthe size of an original or copy pa-per. With some ratios, parts of theimage might not be copied or mar-gins will appear on copies.

❒ You can select a preset ratio whichis near the desired ratio, then ad-just the ratio with the [n] or [o]key.

A Press the {Zoom} key.

B Enter the ratio.

When using the [n] or [o] key

A Enter the desired reproductionratios with the [o] or [n] key.

When using the Number keys

A Enter the desired ratio with theNumber keys.

Note❒ To change the ratio entered,

press the {Clear/Stop } keyand enter the new ratio.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

Page 65: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Directional Size Magnification (inch)—Stretching and Squeezing the Image into the Copy Area

2

Directional Size Magnification (inch)—Stretching and Squeezing the Image into the Copy Area

The suitable reproduction ratios willbe automatically selected when youenter the horizontal and verticallengths of the original and copy im-age you want.

PreparationSpecify the vertical and horizontalsizes of the original and those ofthe copy, as shown in the illustra-tion.

1: Horizontal original size2: Vertical original size3: Horizontal copy size4: Vertical copy size

Note❒ You can enter sizes within the fol-

lowing ranges:

❒ You can change the reproductionratio from 25–400 %.

❒ When you set the originals in thedocument feeder, you can changethe reproduction ratio from 50–200%.

❒ If the calculated ratio is over themaximum or under the minimumratio, it is corrected within therange of the ratio automatically.However, with some ratios, partsof the image might not be copiedor blank margins will appear oncopies.

A Press the {D. Size Mag. (inch) } key.

B Enter the horizontal size of theoriginal with the Number keys.Then press the {#} or 1 key.

Note❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop } key andenter the new value.

C Enter the horizontal size of thecopy with the Number keys.Then, press the {#} or 1 key.

D Enter the vertical size of the origi-nal with the Number keys. Thenpress the {#} or 1 key.

Metric version 1 – 999mm (in 1mm steps)

Inch version 0.1" – 99.9" (in 0.1" steps)

13

2 4

CP2M01EE

53

Page 66: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

54

2

E Enter the vertical size of the copywith the Number keys. Thenpress the [OK] key.

Note❒ To change the length, press the{D. Size Mag. (inch) } key, thenpress the 01 keys.

F Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

Page 67: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Directional Magnification (%)—Stretching and Squeezing the Image in 1% Steps

2

Directional Magnification (%)—Stretching and Squeezing the Image in 1% Steps

Copies can be reduced or enlarged atdifferent reproduction ratios horizon-tally and vertically.

1: Horizontal %2: Vertical %

Note❒ You can change the reproduction

ratio from 25–400 %.❒ When you set the originals in the

document feeder, you can changethe reproduction ratio from 50–200%.

❒ You can select a ratio regardless ofthe size of an original or copy pa-per. With some ratios, parts of theimage might not be copied orblank margins will appear on cop-ies.

A Press the {Direct. Mag.(%) } key.

B Enter the desired horizontal ratiowith the Number keys. Then,press the {#} key or the 1 key.

C Enter the desired vertical ratiowith the Number keys. Then,press the [OK] key.

Note❒ To change the ratio, press the{Direct. Mag.(%) } key, then pressthe 01 keys, then enter thenew ratio.

D Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

55

Page 68: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

56

2

Center/Border Erase—Erasing the Center and the Border

This function erases the center and/or all four sides of the original image,such as book originals.

❖ Center Erase

❖ Border Erase

Two methods are available:

❖ CenterThis mode erases the center mar-gin of the original image.

❖ BorderThis mode erases the surroundingarea of the original image.

Note❒ You can change the width of the

erased margin as follows:

❒ The default size of the erased mar-gin is as follows. You can changethis with the user tools. See “01.Border Erase Width” and “02. Cen-ter Erase Width” in ⇒ P.121 “2. Ad-just Image 1/3”.

❒ The position of the margin to beerased is determined according tothe copy paper size.

❒ 1: Erased part❒ You can use the Center Erase and

Border Erase functions together.

A Press the {Center/Border Erase }key.

B Select the part to be erased.

Metric version 3 – 50mm (in 1mm steps)

Inch version 0.1" – 2.0" (in 0.1" steps)

BA BA

CenterEE

BA BA

BorderEE

Metric version 10mm

Inch version 0.4"

L copy paper K copy paper

1

Page 69: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Center/Border Erase—Erasing the Center and the Border

2

Center

A Press the [Center ] key.

B Enter the center width with theNumber keys. Then press the[OK] key.

Note❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop } keyand enter the new value.

C Press the [Exit ] key.

Border

A Press the [Border ] key.

B Enter the border width withthe Number keys. Then pressthe [OK] key.

Note❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop } keyand enter the new value.

C Press the [Exit ] key.

C Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

57

Page 70: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

58

2

Combine—Combining Originals into One Copy

Use this feature to combine severaloriginal images onto one or morepages.

❖ 2 Orig.

❖ 4 Orig. , 4 Orig.

❖ 8 Orig.

❖ 8 Orig.

❖ 16 Orig.

1: Front2: BackSix methods are available:

❖ 2 Orig.This mode copies two facing pagesonto a one-sided copy.

❖ 4 Orig.4 one-sided pages are copied ontoa single one-sided sheet.

❖ 4 Orig. (optional duplex unit isrequired.)4 one-sided pages are copied onto1 two-sided sheet, 2 original imag-es on each side.

Combine1

1 2 1 2

Combine2

43

1 2

2 31

4

3

1

4

2

Combine3

21

87 3 4

1 2

7 8

5 6

1 2

Page 71: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Combine—Combining Originals into One Copy

2

❖ 8 Orig. Copies eight 1-sided originals to-gether onto one side of copy paper.

❖ 8 Orig. (optional duplex unit is re-quired.)8 one-sided pages are copied onto1 two-sided sheet, 4 original imag-es on each side.

❖ 16 Orig. (optional duplex unit isrequired.)16 one-sided pages are copied onto1 two-sided sheet, 8 original imag-es on each side.

Original direction (when set in docu-ment feeder)• Originals reading from left to right

• Originals reading from top to bot-tom

Limitation❒ You cannot use the bypass tray

with this function.❒ The machine cannot copy originals

different in size and direction.

Note❒ The number of originals copied

(combined) can be 2, 4, 8, or 16.❒ In this mode, the machine selects

the reproduction ratio automati-cally. This reproduction ratio de-pends on the copy paper sizes andthe number of originals.

❒ You can change the reproductionratio from 25–400 %.

❒ When you set the originals in thedocument feeder, you can changethe reproduction ratio from 50–200%.

❒ If the calculated ratio is under theminimum ratio, it is correctedwithin the range of the ratio auto-matically. However, with some ra-tios, parts of the image might notbe copied or blank margins appearon copies.

❒ A separation line between origi-nals can be printed with the usertools. See “06. Line(Combine)” in⇒ P.122 “2. Adjust Image 2/3”.

❒ Even if the direction of originals isdifferent from that of the copy pa-per, the machine will automatical-ly rotate the image by 90° to makecopies properly. (When the AutoReduce/Enlarge function is select-ed)

❒ You can make copies even if thenumber of originals is less than thenumber required in the selectedmode. You can also disable thisfunction with the user tools. See “2.Comb. Auto Eject ” in ⇒ P.124 “3.Input/Output 1/2”.

Combine5

3 41 2

4321

Combine6

34124321

59

Page 72: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

60

2

❒ When the number of originalsplaced is less than the numberspecified for combining, the lastpage(s) will be copied blank asshown in the illustration.

❒ Direction of the originals and ar-rangement of combined images

❖ Portrait (K) originals

❖ Landscape (L) originals

A Press the {Combine/Series } key.

B Press the [Combine ] key.

C Press the [Original ] key.

D Select your original type with the01 keys. If your original type is1 sided, go to Step G.

E Press the [Orientn. ] key, then selectthe original orientation.

F Press the [OK] key.

G Press the [OK] key.

H Select the desired combine modeswith the 01 keys. Then pressthe [OK] key.

Note❒ In 4 pages→ mode, 8 pages→

mode or 16 pages→ mode, youcan specify the orientation oforiginals ( [Top to Top ] [Top toBottom ] ). See .

I Press the 01 keys to select thecopy paper.

J Set your originals.

321

3

21

1 2

85 6 7 8

1 2 3 41 2

42

31

GCSHUY1E

1

35

7

2

46

8

11

2

82

21

43

GCSHUY2E

Page 73: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Combine—Combining Originals into One Copy

2

When setting an original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder

A Set the original, then press the{Start} key.

B Set the next original, thenpress the {Start} key.

Note❒ To finish copying, press the{#} key to eject the copy.

When setting a stack of originals in the document feeder

A Set your originals, then pressthe {Start} key.

61

Page 74: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

62

2

Series Copies—Making One-sided Copies from Various Originals

You can make one-sided copies fromtwo facing pages of bound (book)originals and from two-sided origi-nals.Two methods are available:

❖ Book You can make one-sided copiesfrom two facing pages of a boundoriginal (book).

❖ 2-Sided (The optional documentfeeder is required.)You can make one-sided copiesfrom two-sided originals.

Limitation❒ You cannot use the bypass tray

with this function.

Book —Making One-sided Copies from Two Facing Page of a Bound Original (Book)

Note❒ Refer to the following table when

you select original and copy papersizes with a ratio of 100%:

❖ Metric version

❖ Inch version

A Press the {Combine/Series } key.

B Press the [Series ] key.

C Select [Book → ] with the 01keys. Then press the [OK] key.

D Select the paper by pressing the01 keys.

E Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

1 21 2

Original Copy paper

A3L A4K × 2 sheets

B4JISL B5JISK × 2 sheets

A4L A5K × 2 sheets

Original Copy paper

11" × 17"L 81/2" × 11"K × 2 sheets

81/2" × 11"L 51/2" × 81/2"K × 2 sheets

Page 75: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Series Copies—Making One-sided Copies from Various Originals

2

2-Sided —Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals

The optional document feeder is requiredto use this function.

A Press the {Combine/Series } key.

B Press the [Series ] key.

CMake sure that the [2 Sided →] is selected then press the [

Orientn. ] key.

D Select the original orientation.

E Press the [OK] key.

F Select the paper by pressing the01 keys.

G Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

1 21

2

63

Page 76: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

64

2

Duplex—Making Two-Sided Copies

The optional duplex unit is required to use this function.

Three methods are available:

❖ 1 sided This mode makes two-sided copiesfrom one-sided originals.

❖ 2-sided This mode makes two-sided copiesfrom two-sided originals.

❖ Book This mode makes two-sided copiesfrom facing pages of a bound orig-inal (book).

Limitation❒ You cannot use the following types

of copy paper in this function:• Paper smaller than A5K, 51/2"

× 81/2"K• Translucent paper• Adhesive labels• OHP transparencies• Post cards

❒ You cannot use the bypass traywith this function.

❒ When the paper type is set to“Non-Standard” in the “Changingthe Paper Size in the Tray 2”, du-plex copying is not available withthe tray 2. Select another papertray, change the paper in the tray 2,or set the paper type to Normal orRecycled. See ⇒ P.31 “SelectingCopy Paper”, ⇒ P.105 “Changing thePaper Size in Tray 2”.

Note❒ The following paper limitations

apply:

1 Sided —Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals

Note❒ If you set an odd number of 1-sid-

ed originals in the document feed-er (ADF), the reverse side of thelast page is left blank. You can dis-able this function to make the de-livered last page not be blank. See“1. Duplex Auto Eject” in ⇒ P.124“3. Input/Output 1/2”.

❒ When original images are copied,the images are shifted by the widthof the binding margin. You can ad-just the binding margin or bindingposition. You can also change theirdefault values. See “03. Left Dup.Margin”, “04. Top Dup. Margin”in ⇒ P.121 “2. Adjust Image 1/3”.

Metric version

Mini-mum size

A5L

Weight 64 – 105g/m2

Inch ver-sion

Mini-mum size

51/2" × 81/2"L

Weight 20 – 28 lb

1 2

2

1

Page 77: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Duplex—Making Two-Sided Copies

2

-Originals and copy directionYou can select the orientation ( [Top toTop], [Top to Bottom ] ). See .• Top to Top

• Top to Bottom

-Original direction and completed copies

The resulting copy image will differaccording to the direction in whichyou set your original (lengthwise Kor widthwise L).

*1 The illustrations show the directionsof copied images on the front andback, not the directions of delivery.

Duplex1

Duplex2

Original Orientation Result *1

• [Top to Top]

• [Top to Bottom ]

• [Top to Top]

• [Top to Bottom ]

ABCDuplex3 Duplex5

ABC

Duplex9

Duplex10

AB

C

Duplex6

BADuplex4

BADuplex7

Duplex11

Duplex12

BA

Duplex8

65

Page 78: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

66

2

A Press the [Duplex ] key.

BMake sure that [1 Sided ] is se-lected.

When setting the copy direction

Select the orientation of the copypaper.

Note❒ If you do not set the copy direc-

tion, [Top to Top ] will be selectedautomatically.

A Press the [Orientn. ] key.

B Select the desired orientationwith the 01 keys. Then pressthe OK key.

C Press the [OK] key.

D Set your originals.

When setting an original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder

A Set the original, then press the{Start} key.

B Set the next original, thenpress the {Start} key.

When setting a stack of originals in the document feeder

A Set your originals, then pressthe {Start} key.

2 Sided —Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals

The optional document feeder is requiredto use this function.

A Press the {Duplex } key.

B Select [2 Sided ] with the 1key, then press the [OK] key.

C Set your originals.

1

2

1

2

Page 79: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Duplex—Making Two-Sided Copies

2

When setting an original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder

A Set the original, then press the{Start} key.

B Set the next original, thenpress the {Start} key.

When setting a stack of originals in the document feeder

A Set your originals, then pressthe {Start} key.

Book —Making Two-Sided Copies from Facing Pages of a Bound Original (Book)

Note❒ Refer to the following table when

you select original and copy papersizes with a ratio of 100%:

❖ Metric version

❖ Inch version

A Press the [Duplex ] key.

B Select [Book ] with the 1key,then press the [OK] key.

C Set your originals.

When setting an original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder

A Set the original, then press the{Start} key.

B Set the next original, thenpress the {Start} key.

When setting a stack of originals in the document feeder

A Set your originals, then pressthe {Start} key.

Original Copy paper

A3L A4K (2-sided)

B4JISL B5JISK (2-sided)

A4L A5K (2-sided)

1 2 1

2

Original Copy paper

11" × 17"L 81/2" × 11"K (2-sided)

81/2" × 11"L 51/2" × 81/2"K (2-sided)

67

Page 80: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

68

2

Cover—Adding or Inserting Sheets

Use this feature to have cover pagesinserted/copied onto using differentpaper.

PreparationBefore you can use this function,you need to select the “Tray 2” orthe “Bypass” as Cover Only Traywith the “12. Cover/OHP Tray”.⇒ P.118 “1. General Features 3/4”

There are two types in this function:

❖ Front CoverThe first page of your original iscopied on a specific paper for cov-ers.

❖ Both CoversThe first and last pages of youroriginals are copied on specific pa-per sheets for covers.

Note❒ The cover or slip sheets should be

identical in size and direction withthe copy paper.

❒ If Blank Cover mode is selected,the cover will not be counted as acopy.

Front Cover—Copying or Adding a Front Cover

The first page of your original is cop-ied on a specific paper for covers.

❖ Copy

❖ Blank

Note❒ You can specify whether to copy

onto cover paper. If you select[Copy ], the first page will be copiedon the cover sheet. If you select[Blank ], a cover sheet will just be in-serted before the first copy.

A Press the {Cover/OHP Slip Sheet }key.

B Press the [Front ] key.

C Specify whether to copy on thecover sheet with the 01 keys.Then press the [OK] key.

D Press the [Exit ] key.

32

13

21

32

13

21

Page 81: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Cover—Adding or Inserting Sheets

2

E Set cover sheets on the bypasstray or in the 2nd paper tray.

F Select the tray which identical insize and direction with the copypaper with the 01 keys.

G Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

Both Covers—Copying or Adding Front and Back Covers

The first and last pages of your origi-nals are copied on specific paper forcovers.

❖ Copy

❖ Blank

Note❒ You can specify whether to copy

onto the cover sheet. If you select[Copy ], the first and last pages willbe copied on the cover sheets. Ifyou select [Blank ], a cover sheetwill just be inserted before the firstcopy and another sheet after thelast copy.

A Press the {Cover/OHP Slip Sheet }key.

B Press the [Both ] key.

C Specify whether to copy on thecover sheet with the 01 keys.Then press the [OK] key.

D Press the [Exit ] key.

E Set cover sheets on the bypasstray or in the tray 2.

F Select the copy paper tray con-taining paper indentical in sizeand direction to the cover paperwith the 01keys.

G Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

43

21

43

21

32

13

21

69

Page 82: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

70

2

OHP Slip Sheet—Copying or Inserting Slip Sheets

For each original page, a slip sheetwill be placed after each copy, or aslip sheet will be fed and the sameoriginal image copied onto this slipsheet.

❖ Copy

❖ Blank

PreparationBefore you can use this function,you need to select the “Tray 2” orthe “Bypass” as Cover Only Traywith the “12. Cover/OHP Tray”.⇒ P.118 “1. General Features 3/4”

Note❒ Set slip sheets of the same size and

in the same orientation as OHPtransparencies.

❒ You can specify whether to makecopies onto the inserted slip sheets.

❒ If you do not copy onto a slip sheet,the sheet is excluded from thenumber of copies counted.

A Press the {Cover/OHP Slip Sheet }key.

B Press the [OHP Slip ] key.

C Specify whether to copy on theslip sheet with the 01 keys.Then press the [OK] key.

D Set OHP transparencies in the by-pass tray or tray 2.

E Press the [Exit ] key.

F Set the slip sheets in the papertray, then select this tray by press-ing the 01 keys.

G Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

222121 11

2221 11

Page 83: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Positive/Negative—Copying in Complementary Colors

2

Positive/Negative—Copying in Complementary Colors

If your original is black and white,copy images are inverted.

A Press the {Positive/Negative } key.

B Press the [Pos/Neg. ] key.

C Press the [Exit ] key.

D Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

71

Page 84: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

72

2

Repeat Image—Repeating an Image over the Entire Copy

The original image is copied repeat-edly.

Note❒ The number of repeated images

depends on the original size, copypaper size, and reproduction ratio.Refer to the following table.

❖ Original: 5 1/2" × 81/2"K/Copy paper: 8 1/2" × 11"K or Original: 5 1/2" × 81/2"L/Copy paper 8 1/2" × 11"L

❖ Original: 5 1/2" × 81/2"K/Copy paper: 8 1/2" × 11"L or Original: 5 1/2" × 81/2"L/Copy paper 8 1/2" × 11"K

❒ Part of a repeated image might notbe copied depending on the copypaper size, copy paper direction orreproduction ratio.

❒ You can insert separate lines be-tween repeated images. See “07.Line (Repeat)” in ⇒ P.122 “2. Ad-just Image 2/3”.

A Select the size of the copy paperand the reproduction ratio.

B Press the {Repeat} key.

C Press the [Repeat ] key.

D Press the [Exit ] key.

E Set your original, then press the{Start} key.

4 repeats (71%)

Repeat1

2 repeats (100%) 8 repeats (50%)

Repeat3 Repeat4

Page 85: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Merging Images (Overlay)—Merging Two Different Originals

73

2

Merging Images (Overlay)—Merging Two Different Originals

PreparationThere are three ways to makeOverlay copies.• Overlay-1

Two different originals can bemerged onto the same copy pa-per.

• Overlay-2The machine merges two origi-nals and only the overlappedimage will be copied.

• Overlay-3Originals are merged andwhere black overlaps black theimage is inverted (see the aboveillustration).

The machine can merge two differentoriginals onto the same copy paper.

1: Overlay-12: Overlay-23: Overlay-3

Limitation❒ You cannot change the paper size

once you have selected the Over-lay feature.

❒ When you set different sized origi-nals in the document feeder, partsof the image might not copied. Setthe original on the exposure glass.

A Press the {Overlay } key.

B Press the [Overlay ] key.

C Select the desired mode with the01 keys. Then press the [OK]key.

D Press the [Exit ] key.

Page 86: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

74

2

E Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

Note❒ When setting originals on the

exposure glass, start with thefirst page to be copied. After thefirst original is scanned, removeoriginals and repeat step E.

Page 87: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Preset Stamp—Printing Preset Messages on Your Copies

2

Preset Stamp—Printing Preset Messages on Your Copies

One of the following seven messagescan be stamped on copies.• CONFIDENTIAL• COPY• URGENT• PRIORITY• For Your Information• PRELIMINARY• For Internal Use Only

Limitation❒ You cannot use the bypass tray

with this function.❒ One message can be stamped at a

time.

Note❒ You can change the stamp position

and orientation. See “10. Stamp Po-sition” in ⇒ P.127 “4 Stamp Setting3/3”.

❒ You can select the print page. See⇒ P.77 “When changing the number-ing format”

❒ You can change the stamp size andstamp density. See “08. StampSize” in ⇒ P.126 “4 Stamp Setting 2/3”, “09. Stamp Density” in ⇒ P.127“4 Stamp Setting 3/3”.

-Original setting, stamp position and orientation

You can select the following positionsand orientations.

Key on Display Stamp Position

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

75

Page 88: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

76

2

A Press the {Stamp} key.

B Press the [Preset ] key.

C Select the desired message bypressing the 01 keys. Thenpress the [OK] key.

When changing the stamp position and orientation

A Press the [Position ] key.

B Select the desired stamp posi-tion by pressing the 01 keys.Then press the [OK] key.

C If you want to change thestamp orientation, press the[Orientn. ] key.

D Press the [OK] key.

Original Setting

Ori-enta-tion

Copy Results

Page 89: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Preset Stamp—Printing Preset Messages on Your Copies

2

When changing the numbering format

A Press the [Prt.Page ] key.

B Select the desired mode bypressing the 01 keys. Thenpress the [OK] key.

D Press the [OK] key.

E Press the [Exit ] key.

F Set your originals, then press the{Start} key.

Note❒ When you set the original on the

exposure glass and select the[1st Page Only ] key, press the {#}key after all originals arescanned.

77

Page 90: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

78

2

Page Numbering—Printing Page Numbers

You can print page numbers on yourcopy. There are three types of pagenumbering ( P.1, P2…, 1/5, 2/5…, or-1-, -2-…).

Note❒ You can change the numbering po-

sition. See “05. Page No. Position”in ⇒ P.126 “4 Stamp Setting 2/3”.

❒ If you want to adjust the number-ing position or numbering size, See“02. Page No. Size” or “05. PageNo. Position” in ⇒ P.125 “4 StampSetting 1/3”.

❒ If the page number is up to 999,page numbering is not printed.

❒ If you select numbering format 1/5,2/5,... and if the total pages areover, page numbering is not print-ed.

❒ When you select page numbering,Sort mode is automatically select-ed.

❖ Original setting, stamp position and orientation

A Press the {Stamp} key.

B Press the [Page No.] key.

Original Setting

Ori-enta-tion

Copy Results

Page 91: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Page Numbering—Printing Page Numbers

79

2

C Select the desired mode by press-ing the 01 keys. Then press the[OK] key.

If you selected numbering format P1, P2, … or -1-, -2-, … in step C

A If you wish, do one of the fol-lowing:• To change the page on which

numbering starts, press the[Prt.Page ] key.

• To change the position ofpage number, press the [Posi-tion ] key.

If you selected numbering format 1/5, 2/5, … in step C

A Enter the page on which num-bering will start (Start Page),the total number of pages (To-tal Pages).

B Press the [OK] key.C If you wish, do one of the fol-

lowing:• To change the page on which

numbering starts, press the[Prt.Page ] key.

• To change the position ofpage numbers, press the [Po-sition ] key.

D Press the [OK] key.

Note❒ If you want to change the entered

numbers, press the [Prt.Page ] key.

To change the numbering position

A Press the [Position ] key.

B Select the desired numberingposition by pressing the 1 key.

Note❒ If you want to change the

original orientation, pressthe [Original ] key.

C Press the [OK] key.

E Press the [OK] key.

F Press the [Exit ] key.

Note❒ When you set the original on the

exposure glass, press the {#} keyafter all originals are scanned.

Page 92: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

80

2

Combination Chart

The combination chart given below shows which modes can be used together.When you read the chart, please refer to the following table.

The following shows the combinations of functions.

✩ means that these modes can be used together.

→ means that these modes cannot be used together. The mode after you select will be the mode you're working in.

× means that these modes cannot be used together. The mode before you select will be the mode you're working in.

Mode after you select

Non

-sta

nd

ard

Ori

gin

als

Ori

gin

al T

ype

Sel

ecti

onA

uto

Pap

er S

elec

tA

uto

Red

uce

/En

larg

eS

ort

Rot

ate

Sor

tS

hif

t Sor

tS

hif

t Sta

ckS

tap

leC

opyi

ng

From

Th

e B

ypas

s T

ray

Pre

set R

edu

ce/E

nla

rge

Zoo

mD

irec

tion

al S

ize

Mag

nif

icat

ion

(in

ch)

Dir

ecti

onal

Mag

nif

icat

ion

(%)

Era

se C

ente

rE

rase

Bor

der

Com

bin

e

Ser

ies

Cop

ies

Du

ple

x

Cov

erP

rese

t Sta

mp

Pag

e N

um

ber

ing

OH

P S

lip

Sh

eet

Pos

itiv

e/N

egat

ive

Imag

e R

epea

tO

verl

ay

2 p

ages

→ 1

-sid

ed4

pag

es →

1-s

ided

4 p

ages

→ 2

-sid

ed8

pag

es →

1-s

ided

8 p

ages

→ 2

-sid

ed2-

sid

ed →

1-s

ided

Boo

k →

1-s

ided

1-si

ded

→ 2

-sid

ed2-

sid

ed →

2-s

ided

Boo

k →

2-s

ided

Mod

e be

fore

you

sel

ect

Non-standard Originals

-- ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Original Type Selection

✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Auto Paper Select

× ✩ -- → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → → → ✩ → ✩ ✩ → → ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ✩

Auto Reduce/Enlarge

✩ ✩ × -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × → → → → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩

Sort ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- → → → ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ → × Rotate Sort ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → -- → → → × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ×Shift Sort ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → -- → → × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ×Shift Stack ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → -- × × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ×Staple ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × → → -- × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ×Copying From The Bypass Tray

✩ ✩ → × × × × × × -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × × × × × × × ✩ × × × × × × × × ✩ × ✩

Preset Reduce/Enlarge

✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- → → → ✩ ✩ → → → → → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Zoom ✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → -- → → ✩ ✩ → → → → → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Directional Size Magnification (inch)

✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → -- → ✩ ✩ → → → → → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Directional Magnification (%)

✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → -- ✩ ✩ → → → → → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Erase Center ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩ → → → → → ✩ → ✩ ✩ → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → →Erase Border ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- → → → → → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → →

Page 93: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Combination Chart

81

2

*1 When you select the mode after you select, the machine returns to Auto Reduce/En-large mode. However, you can select the mode before you select again.

Mod

e be

fore

you

sel

ect

Com

bine

2 pages → 1-sided

✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × × -- → → → → → → → → → → ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ×

4 pages → 1-sided

✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × × → -- → → → → → → → → → ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ×

4 pages → 2-sided

✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × × → → -- → → → → → → → → ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ×

8 pages → 1-sided

✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × × → → → -- → → → → → → → ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ×

8 pages → 2-sided

✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × × → → → → -- → → → → → → ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ×

Seri

es C

opie

s 2-sided → 1-sided

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → → → -- → → → → → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → ×

Book → 1-sided

✩ ✩ × × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ → → → → → → -- → → → → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → ×

Du

ple

x

1-sided → 2-sided

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → → → → → -- → → ✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ×

2-sided → 2-sided

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → → → → → → -- → ✩ ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ×

Book → 2-sided

✩ ✩ × × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ → → → → → → → → → -- → ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ×

Cover ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ × ✩ × ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → → → → → ✩ ✩ → -- ✩ ✩ → ✩ → ×Preset Stamp ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩

Page Numbering ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩ × ✩ ✩

OHP Slip Sheet ✩ ✩ × ✩ × × × × × × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → → → ✩ ✩ → → → → ✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩

Positive/Negative ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → ✩ -- ✩ →Image Repeat ✩ ✩ × × × × × × × × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × × → → → → → → → → → → → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- →Overlay ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → → → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × × → → → → → → → → → → → ✩ ✩ ✩ → → --Interrupt ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × × × × × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × × × × × ✩ ✩ × × × × ✩ ✩ × × × ×

Mode after you select

Non

-sta

nd

ard

Ori

gin

als

Ori

gin

al T

ype

Sel

ecti

onA

uto

Pap

er S

elec

tA

uto

Red

uce

/En

larg

eS

ort

Rot

ate

Sor

tS

hif

t S

ort

Sh

ift S

tack

Sta

ple

Cop

yin

g Fr

om T

he

Byp

ass

Tra

yP

rese

t Red

uce

/En

larg

eZ

oom

Dir

ecti

onal

Siz

e M

agn

ific

atio

n (i

nch

)D

irec

tion

al M

agn

ific

atio

n (%

)E

rase

Cen

ter

Era

se B

ord

erC

omb

ine

Ser

ies

Cop

ies

Du

ple

x

Cov

erP

rese

t Sta

mp

Pag

e N

um

ber

ing

OH

P S

lip

Sh

eet

Pos

itiv

e/N

egat

ive

Imag

e R

epea

tO

verl

ay

2 p

ages

→ 1

-sid

ed4

pag

es →

1-s

ided

4 p

ages

→ 2

-sid

ed8

pag

es →

1-s

ided

8 p

ages

→ 2

-sid

ed2-

sid

ed →

1-s

ided

Boo

k →

1-s

ided

1-si

ded

→ 2

-sid

ed2-

sid

ed →

2-s

ided

Boo

k →

2-s

ided

Page 94: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copying

82

2

Page 95: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

3. What to do If SomethingGoes Wrong

If Your Machine does not Operate as You Want

Message

Machine's Condition Problem/Cause Action

The machine instructs you to wait.

The machine is warming up. Wait for the machine to warm-up.

ReferenceYou can use Auto Start mode during the warm-up period. See ⇒ P.48 “Auto Start—Entering Copy Job Settings During the Warm-up Period”

The machine cannot detect the original size.

Unsuitable original is set. See ⇒ P.17 “Sizes Difficult to De-tect”.

Set non-standard size original on the exposure glass.

Input the both horizontal and vertical sizes of the non-stan-dard original. See ⇒ P.27 “Set-ting Originals on the Exposure Glass”.

Select paper manually, not in Auto Paper Select mode.

Do not use Auto Reduce/En-large mode.

Original is not set. Set your originals.

The machine instructs you to check the origi-nal direction.

There is no copy paper that is the same direction as the orig-inals.

Set the original in the same di-rection as the copy paper.

The machine instructs you to check paper size.

Unsuitable original size is set. Select the proper paper size.

The machine cannot staple this size paper.

-- Select the proper paper size that can be used in Staple mode. See ⇒ P.38 “Staple”

83

Page 96: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

84

3

Display

You cannot enter the desired copy set num-ber.

The number of copies exceeds the maximum copy quantity.

You can change the maximum copy quantity that you can make at a time. See “05. Max. Copy Q'ty” in ⇒ P.117 “1. General Features 2/4”

The machine instructs you to set the duplex tray.

-- Reset the duplex tray correct-ly. See ⇒ P.5 “Guide to Compo-nents”.

The machine instructs you to set the key counter.

Set the key counter.

Problem Cause Action

The panel display is off.

The machine is in Energy Sav-er mode.

Press the {Energy Saver } key to cancel Energy Saver mode.

The operation switch is turned off.

Turn on the operation switch.

The main power switch is turned off.

Turn on the main power switch.

Nothing happens when the operation switch is turned on.

The main power switch is turned off.

Turn on the main power switch. See ⇒ P.5 “Guide to Components”

The power cord is unplugged. Maker sure that the power cord is plugged into the wall outlet firmly.

Machine's Condition Problem/Cause Action

Page 97: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

If You Cannot Make Clear Copies

85

3

If You Cannot Make Clear Copies

Problem Cause Action

Copies appear dirty. The image density is too dark. Adjust the image density. ⇒ P.30 “Adjusting Copy Image Density”.

Auto Image Density is not se-lected.

Select Auto Image Density.

The reverse side of an original image is cop-ied.

The image density is too dark. Adjust the image density. ⇒ P.30 “Adjusting Copy Image Density”.

Auto Image Density is not se-lected.

Select Auto Image Density.

A shadow appears on copies if you use the pasted originals.

The image density is too dark. Adjust the image density. ⇒ P.30 “Adjusting Copy Image Density”.

Change the direction of the original.

Put mending tape on the past-ed part.

The same copy area is dirty whenever mak-ing copies.

The exposure glass, platen cover, or document feeder white sheet is dirty.

Clean them. ⇒ P.132 “Main-taining Your Machine”.

Copies are too light. The image density is too light. Adjust the image density. ⇒ P.30 “Adjusting Copy Image Density”.

Damp or rough grain paper is used.

Use dry paper without rough grain.

Toner cartridge is almost empty.

Add toner. ⇒ P.91 “D Chang-ing the Toner Bottle”.

Parts of the image are not copied.

The original is not set correct-ly.

Set originals correctly. ⇒ P.27 “Setting Originals”.

An improper paper size is se-lected.

Select the proper paper size.

Copies are blank. The original is not set correct-ly.

Set originals correctly. ⇒ P.27 “Setting Originals”.

A moire pattern is produced on copies.

Your original has a dot pat-tern image or many lines.

Change the original direction.

�������������

yyyyyyyyyyyyy

R

Page 98: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

86

3

If You Cannot Make Copies as You Want

Adjust Image

Problem Cause Action

Copies are not sta-pled.

There are jammed staples in the stapler.

Remove jammed staples. See ⇒ P.109 “e Removing Jammed Staples”.

Note❒ After removing jammed

staples or adding staples, staples might not be eject-ed the first few times you try to use the stapler.

The number of copies exceeds the capacity of the stapler.

Check the stapler capacity. See ⇒ P.38 “Staple”.

The stapler has run out of sta-ple.

Add staples. See ⇒ P.107 “d Adding Staples”.

Staples are wrongly positioned.

Originals are not set correctly. Set originals correctly. See ⇒ P.38 “Staple”.

Misfeeds occur fre-quently.

Copy paper size setting is not correct.

Set the proper paper size. See ⇒ P.103 “Changing the Paper Size”.

You cannot combine several functions.

Selected functions cannot be used together.

Refer to the combination chart. See ⇒ P.80 “Combina-tion Chart”.

Problem Cause Action

In Center/Border mode, parts of the original image are not copied.

The margin is too wide. Set a narrower margin with the user tools. See “01. Border Erase Width” in ⇒ P.121 “2. Adjust Image 1/3”. See “02. Center Erase Width” in ⇒ P.121 “2. Adjust Image 1/3”.

Your original has narrow margins on four sides.

In Image Repeat mode, the original im-age is not copied re-peatedly.

You selected the same size copy paper as originals, and did not select the proper re-production ratio.

Select copy paper larger than the originals. See ⇒ P.72 “Re-peat Image—Repeating an Image over the Entire Copy”.

Select the proper reproduc-tion ratio. See ⇒ P.72 “Repeat Image—Repeating an Image over the Entire Copy”.

Page 99: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

If You Cannot Make Copies as You Want

3

Combine

Stamp

Problem Cause Action

Parts of the image are not copied.

You specified an improper re-production ratio that does not meet the sizes of your origi-nals and copy paper.

When you specify a reproduc-tion ratio using Manual Paper Select mode, make sure the ra-tio matches your originals and the copy paper.

Note❒ Select the correct repro-

duction ratio before using Combine mode.

Your originals are not identi-cal in size and direction.

Use originals that are identical in size and direction.

Order of copies is not correct.

You set originals in the incor-rect order.

When setting a stack of origi-nal in the document feeder, the last page should be on the bottom.

If you set an original on the exposure glass, start with the first page to be copied.

Problem Cause Action

Stamps do not appear on copies.

The original is not set correct-ly.

Set original correctly.

See ⇒ P.75 “Preset Stamp—Printing Preset Messages on Your Copies”.

Original image and stamp overlap on cop-ies and original image cannot be read.

The stamp is set to solid. Change to screen. See ⇒ P.127 “4 Stamp Setting 3/3”.

Your original has narrow margins on four sides.

Change the stamp position.

See ⇒ P.127 “4 Stamp Setting 3/3”.

Page numbers do not appear in the position you require.

The numbering position is wrong.

Change the numbering posi-tion.

See ⇒ P.126 “4 Stamp Setting 2/3”.

87

Page 100: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

88

3

Duplex

Problem Cause Action

Order of copies is not correct.

You set originals in the incor-rect order.

When setting a stack of origi-nals in the document feeder, the last page should be on the bottom.

If you set an original on the exposure glass, start with the first page to be copied.

In Margin Adjust-ment mode, parts of the original image are not copied.

The margin is too wide. Set a narrower margin with the user tools. See “03. Left Dup. Margin” in ⇒ P.121 “2. Adjust Image 1/3”. See “04. Top Dup. Margin” in ⇒ P.121 “2. Adjust Image 1/3”.

Orientation of copies (Top to Top, or Top to Bottom) is not correct.

You set originals in an incor-rect direction or the orienta-tion setting is incorrect.

Select the correct orientation, or set originals correctly. ⇒ P.64 “Duplex—Making Two-Sided Copies”

Note❒ If you set A3, 11" × 17" or

B4JIS, 81/2" × 14" originals as shown below, for exam-ple, take one of the two ac-tions described below the illustration.

❒ Select [Top to Bottom ] to make copies in “Top to Top” orientation. Select [Top to Top ] to make copies in “Top to Bottom” orien-tation.

❒ Alternate the originals as shown below when setting them.

Page 101: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

B Loading Paper

3

B Loading Paper

Note❒ If you want to change the paper

size, see ⇒ P.103 “Changing the Pa-per Size”.

ReferenceRegarding paper types and sizesthat can be set, see ⇒ P.19 “CopyPaper”.

A Pull out the paper tray until itstops.

B Square the paper and set it in thetray.

Important❒ Do not stack paper over the lim-

it mark.❒ If paper is left in the paper tray

and then you add paper, a mis-feed might occur.

Note❒ Shuffle the paper before setting

it in the tray.

Loading non-standard size paper in the tray 2

AWhen you set the non-standardsize paper in tray 2, do notstack the paper above the low-er limit mark of tray 2.

C Reinstall the back fence.

D Push the paper tray in until itstops.

89

Page 102: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

90

3

Loading Paper in the Large Capacity Tray

Note❒ Set copy paper of the same size

and direction in the left side of thelarge capacity tray.

A Pull out the large capacity tray.

B Place the paper in the tray.

Important❒ Align the right edge of the right

copy paper stack with the rightedge of the tray.

❒ Align the left edge of the leftcopy paper stack with the leftedge of the tray.

❒ Do not stack paper over the lim-it mark.

Note❒ Shuffle the paper before setting

it in the tray.❒ If the paper is curled, set the pa-

per up side down.

C Push the tray in until it stops.

Page 103: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

D Changing the Toner Bottle

3

D Changing the Toner Bottle

When D is displayed, it is time to supply toner.

R WARNING:

R CAUTION:

R CAUTION:

Important❒ If you use toner other than that recommended, a fault might occur.❒ When adding toner, do not turn off the power switch. If you do, your settings

are cleared.❒ Always add toner after the machine instructs you to add toner.

Note❒ You can still make about 50 copies after the D symbol is flashing, but replace

the toner early to prevent poor copy quality.

ReferenceRegarding toner storage, see ⇒ P.23 “Toner Storage”.

• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ig-nite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner containers in accordance with local regulations for plastics.

• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.

• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-ality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies avail-able at an authorized dealer.

• 1: Open the front cover of the machine.

• 2: Lift the green holder.

• 3: Push the green lever, and gently pull out the holder.

91

Page 104: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

92

3

• 4: Press the toner bottle backward to raise its head, then gently pull out the bottle.

• 5: Hold the new bottle horizontally and shake it 5 or 6 times.

Note❒ Do not remove the black cap when

shaking.

• 6: Remove the black cap.

Note❒ Do not remove the inner cap.

• 7: Put the toner bottle on the holder, then press its head forward.

• 8: Push the holder until it clicks.

• 9: Push down the green holder.

• 10: Close the front cover of the ma-chine.

Page 105: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Replacing Photo Conductor Unit (PCU)

3

Replacing Photo Conductor Unit (PCU)

When 'Replace photocondoctor unit' appears on the panel display, it is time toreplace the photo couductor unit.

R WARNING:

Note❒ Do not tilt used PCU after removing it from the machine. If you do, toner

might fall out.❒ Do not hold the developer cartridge when removing the used PCU from your

machine. If you do, the cartridge might come unlocked and fall. ❒ Do not touch the photo couductor. If you do, abnormal copies might be made.❒ Before you remove the used PCU from the machine, wait until the machine

has completely stopped and is making no sound. Failure to take this precau-tion could result in a fault.

❒ If there are misfeeds, remove the misfed paper before removing the usedPCU.

❒ Be sure to remove the sealing tape before setting the new PCU. Leaving it oncould cause a fault.

❒ After replacing the PCU, the machine will take about 1 minutes to initialize.During this period, do not open the front cover or turn off the main switch. Ifyou do, a fault might occur.

A If the duplex unit is installed, open the duplex unit by pushing the catchupwards.

• Do not incinerate the photoconductor unit. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of the used photoconductor unit in accordance with local regulations for plastics.

93

Page 106: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

94

3

B Open the right cover of the machine by pushing the catch upwards.

C Open the front cover.

D While pressing the green button, slide the photo conductor unit out untilit stops.

Page 107: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Replacing Photo Conductor Unit (PCU)

3

E Raise the green handle and slide the photo conductor unit out towards you.

Important❒ Do not tilt or drop the removed photo conductor unit. Moving the unit

abruptly can scatter the toner.❒ While the photo conductor unit is removed, do not change the toner.

F Take the new photo conductor unit from the box and remove the plasticbag, holding the handle.

Important❒ Do not drop or damage the removed photo conductor unit.❒ Do not touch the side of the photo conductor unit.

G Put the photo conductor unit removed in step E into the plastic bag emptiedin step F, keeping the unit at the same angle as when it was installed. Then,zip the plastic bag.

Note❒ Do not tilt the used PCU after Removing it from the machine. If you do,

toner might fall.

H Remove the two red sheets from the photo conductor unit in the ordershown in the illustration.

95

Page 108: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

96

3

Important❒ Remove the photo conductor unit keeping the unit parallel to the ground

as shown in the illustration. Otherwise, the toner in the unit might scatter.❒ Do not touch the inside of the unit or the green parts, after the black pro-

tection sheet is removed.

I Align the new photo conductor unit onto the rail of the machine. Slide theunit all the way into the machine.

J Push the unit into the machine until it clicks into place.

K Remove the red sheet from the photo conductor unit and remove the twopieces of tape.

Page 109: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Replacing Photo Conductor Unit (PCU)

3

L Close the right cover of the machine.

Note❒ If the right side cover of the machine cannot be closed, it means that the

photo conductor unit has not been properly installed. Slide the photo con-ductor unit out and push it into the machine again until it clicks into place.

M Close the front cover.

N If the duplex unit is installed, close the duplex unit by pushing the catchupwards.

Note❒ Confirm that the "Replace PCU" message does not appear on the Opera-

tion Panel.

97

Page 110: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

98

3

x Clearing Misfeeds

R CAUTION:

Important❒ When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the power switch. If you do, your

copy settings are cleared.❒ To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper within the ma-

chine.❒ If paper misfeeds occur repeatedly, contact your service representative.

Note❒ More than one misfed areas may be indicated. In this case, check every appli-

cable area. Refer to the following charts: A, B, C, D, R, P, Y, Z❒ You can find a sticker explaining how to remove misfed paper inside of the

front cover, upper side of the finisher.❒ When the machine instructs you to reset originals, reset your originals to the

feeding position. The display will indicate the number of originals youshould return.

• The fusing section of this equipment might be very hot. You should be very careful that you don't touch this section when removing the misfed paper.

Page 111: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

x Clearing Misfeeds

3

This page is intentionally blank.

99

Page 112: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

100

3

Page 113: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

x Clearing Misfeeds

3

101

Page 114: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

102

3

Page 115: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Changing the Paper Size

3

Changing the Paper Size

PreparationTwo procedures for changing thepaper size are given below. Thefirst is for changing the paper sizein tray 1 or the optional paper ta-ble, the second for changing thepaper size in tray 2. Please checkyou are following the appropriateprocedure before you start.

Important❒ Be sure to select the paper size

with the user tools. Otherwise,misfeeds might occur.

❒ If you want to change the LargeCapacity Tray's paper size, contactyour service representative.

ReferenceFor paper sizes, weight, and capac-ity that can be set in each tray, see⇒ P.19 “Copy Paper”.

Changing the Paper Size in Tray 1 or the Optional Paper Table

AMake sure that the paper tray isnot being used.

B Pull out the paper tray.

Note❒ Remove any remaining copy

paper.

CWhile pressing the release lever,adjust the back fence.

D Release the side lever.

EWhile pressing the release lever,adjust the side fences.

103

Page 116: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

104

3

F Square the paper and set it in thetray.

Important❒ Do not stack paper over the lim-

it mark.

GWhile pressing the release lever,adjust the side fences to the newpaper size.

Important❒ When setting small quantities of

copy paper, be careful not tosqueeze in the side fence too muchor paper will not be fed properly.

H Lock the side lever.

IWhile pressing the release lever,adjust the back fence to the newpaper size.

J Adjust the tray size with the pa-per size selector to the new papersize.

Note❒ If you cannot find your desired

paper size, select “p”, then setthe copy paper size with the “11Special Pap. Size” setting in theSystem Settings manual.

K Push the paper tray in until itstops.

Page 117: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Changing the Paper Size

3

Changing the Paper Size in Tray 2

A Carry out steps A-J described in"Changing the Paper Size in Tray1 or the Optional Paper Table" ⇒P.103 “Changing the Paper Size inTray 1 or the Optional Paper Ta-ble”.

Note❒ If the size of paper you wish to

load is not shown on the scale,slide the paper size selector tothe “p” mark then specify thepaper size and type.

B Push the switch-over lever to theleft or right depending on thetype of paper you have loaded:

Standard Paper

A Push the switch-over lever tothe left.

Non-standard Paper

e.g. OHP transparencies, transpar-ent paper, postcards etc.A Push the switch-over lever to

the right.

Note❒ When you push the switch-

over lever to the right, youcannot use the followingfunctions.• Sort/Stack/Staple• Duplex

C Push the paper tray in until itstops.

Setting the non-standard size paper

A Press the 1 key to select the sec-ond paper tray. Then press the {#}key.

B Press the [Pap.Size] key.

105

Page 118: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

106

3

C Press the [↑Prev.] or [↓Next ] keyuntil the page with the paper sizeyou require is displayed.

When the paper size you require is displayed

A Press the 0 or 1 key to selectthe paper size. Then press the[OK] key.

When the paper size you require is not displayed

Note❒ You can also specify the tray2

size with the User Tools (Sys-tem Settings). See “11. SpecialPap. Size” in the System Set-tings Reference.

AWhen [Custom Size ] screen isshown, press the [OK] key.

B Enter the horizontal size thenpress the {#} key.

C Enter the vertical size thenpress the [OK] key.

D Press the [Pap.Type ] key.

E Press the 0 or 1 key to select thepaper type. Then press the [OK]key.

F Press the [Exit ] key.

Page 119: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

d Adding Staples

3

d Adding Staples

R CAUTION:

Important❒ If you use a staple cartridge other than that recommended, staple failure or

staple jams might occur.

• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-ality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies avail-able at an authorized dealer.

• 1: Open the front cover.

• 2: Remove the cartridge.

• 3: Take out the empty refill in the ar-row direction.

fin101EE

fin102EE

fin103EE

107

Page 120: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

108

3

• 4: Push in the new refill until it clicks.

• 5: Pull out the ribbon.

• 6: Reinstall the cartridge.

• 7: Close the front cover.

fin104EE

fin105EE

fin106EE

fin107EE

Page 121: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

e Removing Jammed Staples

3

e Removing Jammed Staples

Note❒ Staples might be jammed because of curled copies. In this case, try turning the

copy paper over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change to copy paperwith less curl.

❒ After removing jammed staples, staples might not be ejected the first fewtimes you try to use the stapler.

• 1: Open the front cover.

• 2: Remove the cartridge.

• 3: Open the face plate.

fin108EE

fin109EE

fin110EE

109

Page 122: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

What to do If Something Goes Wrong

110

3

• 4: Remove the jammed staples.

• 5: Reinstall the cartridge.

• 6: Close the front cover.

fin111EE

fin112EE

fin113EE

Page 123: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

4. User Tools (Copy Features)

Accessing the User Tools (Copy Features)

This section is for the key operators inchange of this machine. The user toolsallow you to change or set the ma-chine's default settings.

PreparationAlways exit the user tools whenyou have finished.

ReferenceFor how to access the system set-tings, see “Accessing The UserTools (System Settings)” in theSystem Settings Reference.For information the Fax user tools,see the Fax Reference.

A Press the {User Tools/Counter } key.

B Enter {2} with the Number keys.

Note❒ If you press the [Language ] key,

you can select the display lan-guage.

C Enter the number of the desiredUser Tools menu with the Num-ber keys.

Note❒ To return to the previous menu,

press the [PrevMenu ] key.

D Search for the desired settingwith the [↓Next] key. Enter itsnumber with the Number keys.

Note❒ [↓Next] : Press to go to the next

page.❒ [↑Prev. ] : Press to go back to the

previous page.

ReferenceSee ⇒ P.111 “User Tools (CopyFeatures)”.

E Change the settings by followingthe instructions on the panel dis-play. Then press the [OK] key.

ReferenceSee ⇒ P.116 “Settings You CanChange with the User Tools”.

Note❒ [OK] key: Press to set the new

settings and return to the previ-ous menu.

❒ [Cancel ] key: Press to return tothe previous menu withoutchanging any data.

111

Page 124: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (Copy Features)

112

4

Exiting the User Tools

A Press the {User Tools/Counter } key.

Note❒ You can exit the User Tools by

pressing the [Exit ] key on theUser Tools Main Menu.

❒ If you want to return to copymode, press the {User Tools/Counter } key.

❒ The settings are not canceledeven if the power switch isturned off or the {Clear Modes }key is pressed.

Page 125: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Accessing the User Tools (Copy Features)

4

This page is intentionally blank.

113

Page 126: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (Copy Features)

114

4

User Tools Menu (Copier Features)

Page 127: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools Menu (Copier Features)

4

115

Page 128: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (Copy Features)

116

4

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools

ReferenceFor how to access the user tools, see ⇒ P.111 “Accessing the User Tools (CopyFeatures)”.

1. General Features 1/4

Menu Description

01. APS Priority As a default setting, Auto Paper Select is selected. You can cancel this setting.

Note❒ Default: On

02. ADS Priority In Text, Text/Photo and Photo modes, you can specify whether to select Auto Image Density.

Note❒ Default:

• Text: On

• Text/Photo: On

• Photo: Off

03. Original Priority As a default setting, Text is selected as original type. You can change it to Text/Photo, or Photo.

Note❒ Default: Text

04. Quick Mode Check You can specify whether the selected functions are shown on the initial display. If you change the default setting to [On], the display is shown as below.

Note❒ Default: Off

Page 129: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools

4

1. General Features 2/4

Menu Description

05. Max. Copy Q'ty The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 99.

Note❒ Default: 99

06. Original Tone The key tone sounds when you forgot to remove originals after copying.

Note❒ Default: On

❒ If the Panel Tone setting is set to Off, (see “System Set-tings”), the key tone does not sound irrespective Origi-nal Tone setting.

07. Re./En. Priority Specify which Reduce, Enlarge or Input Ratio is shown on the panel display with priority when the [Reduce/Enlarge ] key is pressed.

Note❒ Default:

• Metric version: 71 %

• Inch version: 73 %

08. Image Mode Select You can select the copy quality.

Limitation❒ In Enhanced mode, the optional 48MB copier memory

unit is required to use the sort function.

Note❒ Default: Normal Mode

117

Page 130: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (Copy Features)

118

4

1. General Features 3/4

Menu Description

09. Image Mode Adj. (when 08. Image Mode Select is set to Enhance mode)

Use to fine-tune the finish of copies for each original type setting (Text, Text/Photo, Photo)

1 Text

Use to adjust the cut of edges in the final image.

Note❒ Applied when the Original Type indicator is lit, and Text is selected.

2 Text/Photo

When your document contains a mixture of text and photographs, this settings ad-justs which of the two take priority in the final image.

Note❒ Applies when Text/Photo has been selected with {Original Type } key.

3 Photo

Choose a setting that matches the type of photographic original you are copying.

Note❒ Applies when Photo has been selected with the {Original Type } key.

❒ Coarse Print: Printed photographs are rendered using coarse dots.

❒ Press Print: Printed photographs are rendered using fine dots.

❒ Glossy Photo: For original photographs with a fine level gradation.

09. Image Mode Adj. (when 08. Image Mode Select is set to Normal mode)

Use to fine-tune the finish of copies for each original type setting (Text, Text/Photo, Photo)

1 Text

Use to adjust the cut of edges in the final image.

Note❒ Applies when the Original Type indicator is lit, and Text is selected.

2 Text/Photo

When your document contains a mixture of text and photographs, this settings ad-justs which of the two take priority in the final image.

Note❒ Applies when Text/Photo has been selected with {Original Type } key.

Page 131: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools

19

4

1

1. General Features 4/4

3 Photo

Choose a setting that matches the type of photographic original you are copying.

Note❒ Applies when Photo has been selected with the {Original Type } key.

❒ Glossy Photo: Renders printed photographs using large dots like that of a news-paper.

❒ Coarse Print: Renders printed photographs coarsely, similar to gravure printing.

❒ Glossy Photo: For original photographs with a fine level gradation.

10. Image Dens. (Text) You can select original text density setting level.

Note❒ Default: Normal

11. Duplex Priority You can select the type of the Duplex function to be effec-tive when the machine is turned on, Energy Saver mode is off, or Copy Reset Timer is on.

Note❒ Default: Off

12. Cover/OHP Tray You can select a special tray for cover and OHP.

Note❒ Default: Bypass

Menu Description

13. Copy Reset Timer The machine returns to its initial condition automatically after your job is finished. The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, or Off.

Note❒ Default: 60 sec.

14. Initial Mode Set You can select the initial mode or Program No. 10 as the mode to be effective when modes are cleared.

Note❒ Default: Standard

15. Bypass Mode Clear Specify whether to clear the bypass tray settings when the machine is turned on, Energy Saver mode is off, or the Copy Reset Timer times out.

Note❒ Default: Off

Menu Description

Page 132: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (Copy Features)

120

4

16. Key Op. Tools

If the machine is set to use the User Code function, operators must input their user codes before the machine can operate.

The machine can keep count of the number of copies made under each user code.

1. User Code Mgmt. Specify whether to employ user codes to restrict copier us-ers and manage the number of copies made.

Note❒ Default: Off

2. Counter Reset You can check the number of copies made under each user code. You can also reset each user code's counter to 0.

Note❒ If more than one user code is registered, you can view all

the counters using the [↑Prev.] or [↓Next] key.

3. Clear Code/Counter You can delete all user codes or reset all counters to 0.

4. Prog. User Code You can register user codes.

Note❒ Up to 50 user codes (8 digits or less) can be registered.

5. Chg/Del User Code You can change or delete user codes.

Note❒ The number of copies made under the old code is added

to that made under the new user code.

❒ The number of copies made under the deleted code is also deleted.

6. Counter List Print You can print a list of counters shown by user code.

Limitation❒ If A4, 81/2" × 11" or larger paper is not set in the paper

trays, this list cannot be printed.

Note❒ To stop the printing, press the [Cancel ] key.

Menu Description

Page 133: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools

21

4

1

2. Adjust Image 1/3

Menu Description

01. Border Erase Width The default width of erased margins in Border Erase mode can be changed as follows:

• Metric version: 3 – 50mm in 1mm steps

• Inch version: 0.1 – 2.0" in 0.1" steps

Note❒ Default:

• Metric version: 10mm

• Inch version: 0.4"

02. Center Erase Width The default width of erased margins in Center Erase mode can be changed as follows:

• Metric version: 3 – 50mm in 1mm steps

• Inch version: 0.1 – 2.0" in 0.1" steps

Note❒ Default:

• Metric version: 10mm

• Inch version: 0.4"

03. Left Dup. Margin You can specify left margin on the back side of copies.

• Metric version: 0 – 50mm in 1mm steps

• Inch version: 0 – 2.0" in 0.1" steps

Limitation❒ The optional duplex unit is required.

Note❒ Default:

• Metric version: 5mm

• Inch version: 0.2"

04. Top Dup. Margin You can specify back top margin on the front side of copies.

• Metric version: 0 – 50mm in 1mm steps

• Inch version: 0 – 2.0" in 0.1" steps

Limitation❒ The optional duplex unit is required.

Note❒ Default:

• Metric version: 5mm

• Inch version: 0.2"

Page 134: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (Copy Features)

122

4

2. Adjust Image 2/3

Menu Description

05. Line (Combine) You can select a type of separation line in Combine mode from None, Solid line, Broken 1, Broken 2, or Crop Marks.

• None

• Solid

• Broken 1

• Broken 2

• Crop Marks

Note❒ Default: None (no line)

Page 135: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools

4

06. Line (Repeat) You can select a type of separation line in Image Repeat mode from None, Solid, Broken 1, Broken 2, or Crop Marks.

• None

• Solid

• Broken 1

• Broken 2

• Crop Marks

Note❒ Default: None (no line)

Menu Description

123

Page 136: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (Copy Features)

124

4

3. Input/Output 1/2

Menu Description

1. Duplex Auto Eject When making two-sided copies from one-sided originals, if the last original is an odd page, the last copy will be automat-ically delivered with the reverse side blank. You can cancel this setting. ⇒ P.64 “Duplex—Making Two-Sided Copies”

Limitation❒ The optional duplex unit is required.

Note❒ When you set one original at a time in the document

feeder or set an original on the exposure glass, this func-tion does not come effect.

❒ Default: On

2. Comb. Auto Eject As a default setting, if the number of originals in the option-al document feeder is less than the number required in the selected Combine mode, the missing image are copied blank. You can cancel this setting. ⇒ P.58 “Combine—Com-bining Originals into One Copy”

Limitation❒ When you set one original at a time in the document

feeder or set an original on the exposure glass, this func-tion does not come into effect.

Note❒ Default: On

3. Original Count As a default setting, the display shows the copy quantity you specified and the number of copies made. You can can-cel this setting, and instead view the number of originals to be fed in the document feeder and the number of copies made.

Note❒ Default: Off

4. SADF Auto Reset When you set one original at a time in the optional docu-ment feeder, the Auto Feed indicator lights for a selected time after an original is fed to show that the document feed-er is ready for another original. You can adjust this time from 3 seconds to 99 seconds in 1 second steps.

Limitation❒ The optional document feeder (ADF) is required.

Note❒ Default: 4 seconds

Page 137: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools

4

3. Input/Output 2/2

4 Stamp Setting 1/3

Menu Description

5. R. Srt. AutPap. Cont If you select [Off ] when the paper tray in use runs out of pa-per, the machine stops allowing you to add paper to the tray so you can have all the copies rotate-sorted.

Note❒ Default: Off

6. Sort You can select a Sort function. ⇒ P.35 “Sort—Sorting into Sets (123, 123, 123)”

Limitation❒ The optional finisher is required to use the Shift Sort

function.

Note❒ Default:

• Machine with finisher or shift sort tray: Shift Sort

• Machine without finisher or shift sort tray: Rotate Sort

Menu Description

01. Page No. Priority You can select the type of Page number priority.

Note❒ Default: P1, P2...

02. Page No. Size You can select the size of page numbers.

Note❒ Default: Auto

03. Dup. Back Page No. When making Duplex copies (Top to Top), you can select the position of page numbers on the back side of copies.

Note❒ Default: Left Side

04. Page No. (Combine) When making Combine copies, you can select numbering per original or per copy.

Note❒ Default: Per Original

125

Page 138: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (Copy Features)

126

4

4 Stamp Setting 2/3

Menu Description

05. Page No. Position You can select the position of page numbers for each Stamp mode.

Note❒ Default:

• P1, P2...: Top Right

• 1/5, 2/5...: Top Right

• -1-, -2-...: Bottom Center

06. Page No. Adjust When you print page numbers on the top right, you can ad-just the position in the range 0–50mm, 0–2.0 inch in 1mm, 0.1 inch steps.

Note❒ Default:

• Top: 0mm, 0.0"

• Right: 0mm, 0.0"

07. Stamp Priority You can select the type of Stamp priority.

Note❒ Default: CONFIDENTIAL

08 Stamp Size You can select the size of the stamp.

Note❒ Default: 1x

Page 139: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools

4

4 Stamp Setting 3/3

Menu Description

09. Stamp Density You can select the stamp density.

Note❒ Default: Screen

10. Stamp Position You can select the position of the stamp.

Note

❒ Default: Top

11 Stamp Adjustment When you print the stamp, you can adjust the position in the range 0–50mm, 0 – 2.0 inch in 1mm, 0.1 inch steps. This setting is valid for all types of stamps.

Note❒ Default:

• Top: 0mm, 0.0"

• Right: 0mm, 0.0"

12 Stamp Page Prio. You can select the stamp page priority.

Note❒ Default: All Pages

127

Page 140: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (Copy Features)

128

4

Page 141: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

5. Remarks

29

1

Do's and Don'ts

R CAUTION:

Important❒ Make sure the remaining memory space is 100%, before you unplug the pow-

er cord.❒ While the machine is unplugged, you can neither send nor receive a fax.

ReferenceFor details, see the Facsimile Reference.

• Do not touch areas on or around the fusing unit. These areas get hot.• After making copies continuously, you may feel the exposure glass is heated.

This is not a malfunction. • You may feel warm around the ventilation hole. This is caused by exhaust air,

and is not a malfunction.• Do not turn off the operation switch while copying or printing. When turning

off the operation switch, make sure that copying or printing is completed.• The machine might fail to produce good copy images if condensation forms

inside the machine due to temperature change.• Do not open the covers of the machine while copying or printing. If you do,

misfeeds might occur.• Do not move the machine while copying or printing.• If you operate the machine improperly or a failure occurs, your settings might

be lost. Be sure to take a note of your machine settings.• Supplier shall not be liable for any loss or damages resulting from a failure on

the machine, loss of machine settings, and use of the machine.• Do not touch the Allen key if it is stored in the inner front cover.

It is used by your service representative.

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment. While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the equipment.

Page 142: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Remarks

130

5

Where to Put Your Machine

Machine Environment

Your machine's location should be carefully chosen because environmental con-ditions greatly affect its performance.

Optimum environmental conditions

R CAUTION:

R CAUTION:

R CAUTION:

• Temperature: 10 – 32°C (50 – 89.6°F), humidity 50% at 32°C, 89.6°F• Humidity: 15 – 80%, temperature 27°C, 80.6°F at 80%• A strong and level base.• The machine must be level within 5mm, 0.2" both front to rear and left to

right.• To avoid possible build-up of ozone, be sure to locate this machine in a large

well ventilated room that has an air turnover of more than 30 m3/hr/person.

Environments to avoid

• Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light (more than 1,500 lux).• Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air

from a heater. (Sudden temperature changes might cause condensation with-in the machine.)

• Places where the machine might be subjected to frequent strong vibration.• Dusty areas.• Areas with corrosive gases.

• Keep the equipment away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might occur.

• Do not place the equipment on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, it could cause injury.

• Before moving the equipment, be sure to pull all four handles fully out. Not doing this may result in an injury, such as getting your fingers pinched. After moving the equipment, return the four handles to their original positions.

• When the optional paper tray unit is installed, do not push the upper part of the main unit horizontally. If the paper tray unit becomes detached from the main unit, this could cause an injury.

• If you use the equipment in a confined space, make sure there is a continu-ous air turnover.

Page 143: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Where to Put Your Machine

31

5

1

Power Connection

R WARNING:

R CAUTION:

R CAUTION:

• When the main switch is in the Stand-by positions, the optional anti-conden-sation heaters are on. In case of emergency, unplug the machine's power cord.

• When you unplug the power cord, the anti-condensation heaters turn off.• Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.• Voltage must not fluctuate more than 10%.

Access to Machine

Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.

1. Rear: more than 1cm (0.4")

2. Right: more than 1cm (0.4")

3. Front: more than 75cm (29.6")

4. Left: more than 1cm (0.4")

Note❒ For the required space when options are installed, please contact your service

representative.

• Only connect the machine to the power source described on the inside front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and do not use an extention cord.

• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend it more than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment. While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the equipment.

• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the plug (not the cable).

2

1

3

4

CP999EE

Page 144: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Remarks

132

5

Maintaining Your Machine

If the exposure glass, platen covers ordocument feeder white sheet is dirty,you might not be able to make copiesas you want. Clean them if you findthem dirty.

❖ Cleaning the machineWipe the machine with a soft,damp cloth. Then wipe it with adry cloth to remove the water.

Important❒ Do not use chemical cleaner or or-

ganic solvent such as thinner orbenzene. If they get into the ma-chine or melt plastic parts, a failuremight occur.

❒ Do not clean parts other than thosespecified in this manual. Suchparts should be cleaned by yourservice representative.

Cleaning the Exposure Glass

Cleaning the Platen Cover

Cleaning the Document Feeder

ND1C0200

TRSR140E

Page 145: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

6. Specification

33

1

Mainframe

❖ Configuration:Desktop

❖ Photosensitivity type:OPC drum (Φ30)

❖ Original scanning:One-dimensional solid scanning system through CCD

❖ Copy process:Dry electrostatic transfer system

❖ Development:Dry two-component magnetic brush development system

❖ Fusing:Heating roll system

❖ Resolution:600dpi

❖ Exposure glass:Stationary original exposure type

❖ Original reference position:Rear left corner

❖ Warm-up time:Less than 45 seconds (20°C)

❖ Originals:Sheet/book/objects

❖ Maximum original size:A3L, 11" × 17"L

❖ Copy paper size:• Trays: A3L – A5L, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"L• Bypass: A3L – A5L, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"L• Bypass (non-standard size):

Vertical: 90 – 305mm, 3.6" – 12.0"Horizontal: 148 – 432mm, 6.0" – 17.0"

• Duplex: A3L – A5L, 11" × 17"L – 81/2" × 11"L• LCT: A4K, 81/2" × 11"K

Page 146: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Specification

134

6

❖ Copy paper weight:• Paper tray: 64 – 105g/m2 (20 – 28 lb)• Bypass tray: 64 – 157g/m2 (20 – 42 lb)• Duplex unit: 64 – 105g/m2 (20 – 28 lb)• LCT: 64 – 105g/m2 (20 – 28 lb)

❖ Non-reproduction area:• Leading edge: 3 ± 2mm• Trailing edge: 3 ± 3/–2mm• Left edge: 2 ± 1.5mm• Right edge: 2 ± 2.5mm/–1.5

❖ First copy time:5 seconds or less(A4K, 81/2" × 11"K 100%, feeding from 1st paper tray, A4KL, 81/2" ×11"KL Text mode, Auto Image Density)

❖ Copying speed: (Type 1)• 13 copies/minute (A3L, 11" × 17"L)• 15 copies/minute (B4JISL)• 22 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)

❖ Copying speed: (Type 2)• 15 copies/minute (A3L, 11" × 17"L)• 17 copies/minute (B4JISL)• 27 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)

Page 147: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Mainframe

6

❖ Reproduction ratio:Preset reproduction ratios:

Zoom: From 25% to 400 % in 1% steps.*1 When you set the originals in the document feeder, you can change the reproduc-

tion ratio from 50 – 200 %.

❖ Continuous copying count:1 – 99 copies

❖ Copy paper capacity:• 1st and 2nd paper trays: 500 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)

-- Metric version Inch version

Enlargement 400% *1 400% *1

200% 200%

141% 155%

122% 129%

115% 121%

Full Size 100% 100%

Reduction 93% 93%

87% 85%

82% 78%

71% 73%

65% 65%

50% 50%

25% *1 25% *1

135

Page 148: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Specification

136

6

❖ Power consumption:• Mainframe only

• Full system

*1 Mainframe with the document feeder, bridge unit, paper tray unit, large capac-ity tray, finisher, duplex unit, 1 bin tray and 48MB copier memory unit.

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H up to exposure glass):• 550 × 580 × 709mm, 21.7" × 22.9" × 28.0"

❖ Noise Emission (ISO7779 Sound Power Level)Based on actual measurement

❖ Weight:• Type 1, 2: Approx. 55kg, 121.3 lb

Note❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Type 1 Type 2

Warm up About 1.0kW About 1.0kW

Stand-by About 120Wh About 120Wh

Copying About 500Wh About 500Wh

Maximum Less than 1.44kW Less than 1.44kW

Type 1 *1 Type 2

Warm up About 1.0kW About 1.0kW

Stand-by About 130Wh About 130Wh

Copying About 500Wh About 500Wh

Maximum Less than 1.44kW Less than 1.44kW

Mainframe only Complete System

Copying 64dB (A) 67.5dB (A)

Stand-by 40dB (A) 40dB (A)

Page 149: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Document Feeder (Option)

6

Document Feeder (Option)

❖ Mode:ADF mode, SADF mode

❖ Original size:• A3L – A5KL• 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL

❖ Original weight:• 1-sided originals: 40 – 128g/m2 (11 – 34 lb)• 2-sided originals: 52 – 105g/m2 (14 – 28 lb) (Duplex)

❖ Number of originals to be set:50 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)

❖ Maximum power consumption:50W (power is supplied from the main frame.)

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):550 × 470 × 130mm, 21.7" × 18.6" × 5.2"

❖ Weight:Approx. 10kg, 22.1 lb

Note❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

137

Page 150: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Specification

138

6

Paper Tray Unit (Option)

❖ Copy paper weight:64 – 105g/m2 (20 – 28 lb)

❖ Available paper size:A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5L, 5 1/2" × 8 1/2"L, 7 1/4" × 10 1/2"L,8" × 10"KL, 8 1/2" × 11"KL, 8" × 13"L, 8 1/2" × 13"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/4" ×13"L, 10" × 14"L, 11" × 17"L, 8KL, 16KKL

❖ Maximum power consumption:28W (power is supplied from the main frame.)

❖ Paper capacity:500 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb) × 2 trays

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):550 × 520 × 271mm, 21.7" × 20.5" × 10.7"

❖ Weight:Approx. 25kg, 55.2 lb

Note❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Page 151: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Internal Tray 2 (1bin tray) (Option)

6

Internal Tray 2 (1bin tray) (Option)

❖ Number of bins:1

❖ Available paper size:A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5L, 11" × 17"L, 8 1/2" × 14"L, 8 1/2" ×11"KL, 5 1/2" × 8 1/2"L

❖ Paper capacity:125 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)

Note❒ The paper capacity might be less than 125 sheets when copy paper is con-

siderably curled.

❖ Copy paper weight:60 – 105g/m2 (16 – 28 lb)

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):530 × 410 × 110mm, 20.9" × 16.2" × 4.4"

❖ Weight:Approx. 1.1kg, 2.5 lb

Note❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

139

Page 152: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Specification

140

6

Finisher (Option)

❖ Paper size:A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5L, 5 1/2" × 8 1/2"L, 8" × 10"KL, 8" ×13"L,8 1/2" × 11"KL, 8 1/2" × 13"L, 8 1/2" × 14"L, 8 1/4" × 13"L, 10" × 14"L,11" × 17"L, 8KL, 16KKL

❖ Paper weight:52 – 157g/m2, 14 – 42 lb

❖ Stack capacity:• 1,000 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K or smaller) (80g/m2, 20 lb)• 500 sheets (B4JIS, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb)

❖ Staple capacity:• 30 sheets (A4, 81/2" × 11" or smaller) (80g/m2, 20 lb)• 20 sheets (B4JIS, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb)

❖ Staple paper size:A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, 8" × 10"KL, 8 1/2" × 11"KL, 8" × 13"L,8 1/2" × 13"L, 8 1/2" × 14"L, 8 1/4" × 13"L, 10" × 14"L, 11" × 17"L, 8KL,16KKL

❖ Staple paper weight:64 – 80g/m2, 17 – 20 lb

❖ Staple position:1 position (upper left)

❖ Power consumption:48W (power is supplied from the main frame.)

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):568 × 520 × 625mm, 22.4" × 20.5" × 24.6"

❖ Weight:Approx. 21kg, 46.3 lb

Page 153: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Shift Sort Tray (Option)

6

Shift Sort Tray (Option)

❖ Paper size:A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 5 1/2" × 8 1/2"L, 7 1/4" × 10 1/2"KL, 8" × 10"KL, 8 1/2" × 11"KL, 8" × 13"L, 8 1/2" × 13"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 8 1/4" × 13"L, 11" × 17"L, 8KL, 16KKL

❖ Paper weight:52 – 157g/m2, 14 – 42 lb

❖ Paper capacity:250 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K or smaller) (80g/m2, 20 lb)125 sheets (B4JIS, 81/2" × 14" or larger) (80g/m2, 20 lb)

❖ Power consumption:3.6 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H)430 × 372 × 148 mm, 17" × 15" × 6"

❖ Weight:Approx. 1.6kg, 3.5 lb

141

Page 154: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Specification

142

6

Large Capacity Tray (LCT) (Option)

❖ Paper size:• Metric version: A4K• Inch version: 81/2" × 11"K

❖ Paper weight:64 – 105g/m2, 20 – 28 lb

❖ Paper capacity:2,000 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)

❖ Power consumptionApprox. 30W (power is supplied from the main frame.)

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):550 × 520 × 271mm, 21.7" × 20.5" × 10.7"

❖ Weight:Approx. 25kg, 55.2 lb

Page 155: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Duplex Unit (Option)

6

Duplex Unit (Option)

❖ Paper size:A3L, B4JISL, A4KL, B5JISKL, A5L, 5 1/2" × 8 1/2"L, 7 1/4" × 10 1/2"KL, 8" × 10"KL, 8 1/2" × 11"KL, 8" × 13"L, 8 1/2" × 13"L, 81/2" × 14"L,8 1/4" × 13"L, 11" × 17"L, 8KL, 16KKL

❖ Paper weight:64 – 105g/m2, 20 – 28 lb

❖ Power consumption (Max):35W (power is supplied from the main frame.)

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):90 × 520 × 400mm, 3.6" × 20.5" × 15.8"

❖ Weight:Approx. 6kg, 13.3 lb

143

Page 156: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Specification

144

6

Bypass Tray (Option)

❖ Available paper size:• Standard size (metric version): A3L, A4L, A5L, 8" × 13"L• Standard size (inch version): 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 13"L, 81/2"

× 11"L, 51/2" × 81/2"L• Non-standard size: Vertical (90 – 305mm, 3.6" – 12.0"), Horizontal (148 –

432mm, 6.0" – 17.0")

❖ Copy paper weight:60 – 157g/m2, 16 – 42 lb

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):296 × 495 × 163mm, 11.7" × 19.5" × 6.5"

❖ Paper capacity:• 52 – 90g/m2, 16 – 20 lb: 100 sheets

❖ Weight:Approx. 2.5kg, 5.6 lb

Page 157: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

48MB Copier Memory Unit (Option)

6

48MB Copier Memory Unit (Option)

❖ Memory capacity:48MB

❖ Additional functions:• Enhanced print quality• Increased memory capacity

❖ Number of originals that can be stored: about 100 pages(reference value based on ITU-T No.4 chart)

145

Page 158: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

146

INDEX

1000-sheet finisher, 7, 35, 1401 bin tray, 7, 13948MB copier memory unit, 7, 145

A

Access to Machine, 131Adding Staples, 107Adjusting Copy Image Density, 30Auto Image Density, 30Auto Off, 26Auto Paper Select, 32Auto Reduce/Enlarge, 33Auto Reset, 26Auto Start, 48

B

Basic Functions, 30Both Covers, 69Bridge unit, 7Bypass tray, 6, 7, 41, 144

C

Changing the Paper Size, 103Changing the Toner Bottle, 91Clearing Misfeeds, 98Combination Chart, 80Combine, 58Copying from the Bypass Tray, 41copy initial display, 11Copy Paper, 19Cover, 68

D

Deleting a Program, 46Directional Magnification (%), 55Directional Size Magnification (inch), 53Document feeder (ADF), 5, 7, 27, 132, 137Do's and Don'ts, 129Duplex, 64Duplex unit, 7, 143

E

Energy Saver, 47Enlarging, 50

Erase Border, 56Erase Center, 56Exposure glass, 5, 16, 18, 27, 132

F

Fax key, 15Front Cover, 68Front cover, 6

I

Image Repeat, 72Interchange unit, 7Internal tray, 5Internal tray 2, 7, 139Interrupt, 47

J

Jammed Staples, 109

L

Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 7, 90, 142Loading Paper, 89Lower right cover, 6

M

Machine Environment, 130Mainframe, 133Main Power indicator, 6Main power switch, 5, 13Maintaining, 132Manual Image Density, 30Message, 83

O

OHP Slip Sheet, 70On indicator, 6Operation panel, 6, 8Operation switch, 6, 13Options, 7Originals, 16, 27Original Tone, 49Original type, 31

P

Panel display, 11

Page 159: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Paper tray, 6Paper tray cover, 6Paper tray unit, 6, 7, 138Photo Conductor Unit, 24Platen cover, 5, 7, 132Positive/Negative, 71Power Connection, 131Preset Reduce/Enlarge, 50Program, 45

R

Recalling a Program, 46Reducing, 50Remarks, 129Replacing the Photo Conductor Unit, 93Rotate Sort, 36

S

Safety Information, iSelecting Copy Paper, 31Selecting Original Type Setting, 31Series Copies, 62Shift Sort, 36Shift Stack, 37Sort, 35Specification, 133Stack, 37Staple, 38Storing Your Settings, 45

T

Toner, 23

U

User Codes, 48User Tools, 111

V

Ventilation hole, 5

Z

Zoom, 52

147

Page 160: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

148

UE USA A267
Page 161: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

220/270

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

SYSTEM SETTINGS

uture

Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for freference.For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.
Page 162: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

220/270 O

RICOH COMPANY, LTD.15-5, 1 chome, Minami-Aoyama, Minato-ku, Tokyo Telephone: Tokyo 3479-3111

PERATIN

Overseas Affiliates

G IN

STRUC

TION

S

U.S.A.RICOH CORPORATION5 Dedrick PlaceWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006Phone: +1-973-882-2000

The NetherlandsRICOH EUROPE B.V.Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, AmstelveenPhone: +31-(0)20-5474111

United KingdomRICOH UK LTD.Ricoh House,1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,Middlesex, TW13 7HGPhone: +44-(0)181-261-4000

GermanyRICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbHMergenthalerallee 38-40,65760 EschbornPhone: +49-(0)6196-9060

FranceRICOH FRANCE S.A.383, Avenue du Général de GaulleBP 307-92143 Clamart CedexPhone: +33-(0)1-40-94-38-38

SpainRICOH ESPAÑA S.A.Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,08005 BarcelonaPhone: +34-(0)93-295-7600

ItalyRICOH ITALIA SpAVia della Metallurgia 12,37139 VeronaPhone: +39-(0)45-8181500

Hong KongRICOH HONG KONG LTD.23/F., China Overseas Building,139, Hennessy Road,Wan Chai, Hong KongPhone: +852-2862-2888

SingaporeRICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.260 Orchard Road,#15-01/02 The Heeren,Singapore 238855Phone: +65-830-5888

Printed in Japan

UE USA A267-8607

Page 163: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Introduction

This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To getmaximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions inthis manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information relatedto USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.

Notes:

Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine.

Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Operator Safety:

This machine is considered a CDRH Class I laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine con-tains a 5-milliwat, 760 – 800 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected)eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlockmechanism have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.

Laser Safety:

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unitin the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisiteequipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laserchassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassisand laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is re-quired.

Warning:

Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manualmight result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Notes:

The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your ma-chine before reading this manual. (For details, see ⇒ P.2 “Machine Types”.)

• Type 1: Aficio 220

• Type 2: Aficio 270

Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.

For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.

Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts otherthan genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.

Power Source:

120V, 60Hz, 12A or more

Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about the powersource, see “Power Connection” in the Copy Reference manual.

Page 164: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Note to users in the United States of America

Notice:This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursu-ant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection againstharmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmfulinterference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occurin a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television re-ception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try tocorrect the interference by one more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver isconnected.Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.

WarningChanges or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could voidthe user's authority to operate the equipment.

1. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to host com-puter (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.

2. AC adapter with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Ricoh Corporation, 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006973-882-2000Note to users in Canada

Note:This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada

Avertissement:Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:a means POWER ON.c means STAND BY.

TrademarksMicrosoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the unitedStates and/or other countries.PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe System Incorporated.Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of theirrespective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.

Copyright © 1999 Ricoh Co., Ltd.

Page 165: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Energy Star Program

• Low Power modeThis product automatically lowers its power consumption 15 minutes afterthe last copy or print job has finished. Fax reception and printing is still pos-sible in Low Power mode, but if you wish to make copies press the {EnergySaver} key first.For how to change the default interval that the machine waits before enteringLow Power mode, see “Energy Saver Timer” on ⇒ P.18 “System Settings 2/5”.

• Sleep mode(Fax and printer installed)If the fax or printer features are installed, this product automatically lowersits power consumption even further 60 minutes after the last copy or print jobhas finished. Fax reception and printing is still possible in Sleep mode, but ifyou wish to make copies press the operation switch first. For how to change the default interval that the machine waits before enteringSleep mode, see “Auto Off Timer” on ⇒ P.19 “System Settings 3/5”

• Auto Off mode(Copier only)If neither the fax feature nor printer feature is installed, this product automat-ically turns itself off 60 minutes after the last copy or print job has finished. Ifyou wish to make copies when the machine is in Auto Off mode, press the op-eration switch. For how to change the default interval that the machine waits before enteringAuto Off mode, see “Auto Off Timer” on ⇒ P.19 “System Settings 3/5”.

• Duplex Priority(Optional Duplex Tray required)To conserve paper resources, the Duplex function (1-Sided/2-Sided) is select-ed preferentially when you turn on the operation switch or the main powerswitch, press the {Clear Modes }key, or when the machine resets itself automat-ically. For how to turn Duplex Priority mode on or off, refer to the "DuplexPriority" section in the Copy Reference manual.

As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have deter-mined that this machine model meets the ENER-GY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.

The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving sys-tem for developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with en-vironmental issues, such as global warming.

When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Part-ner shall place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model.

This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode.

i

Page 166: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

ii

❖ Specification

❖ Recycled paperPlease contact your sales or service representative for recommended recycledpaper types that may be used in this machine.

Copier only Fax and printer installed

Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2

Low Power mode

Power consump-tion

50 wh 70 wh

Default interval 15 minutes 15 minutes

Recovery time Less than 30 seconds Less than 30 seconds

Sleep mode Power consump-tion

- 50 wh

Default interval - 60 minutes

Auto Off mode

Power consump-tion

10 wh -

Default interval 60 minutes -

Duplex Priority One-sided copying

Page 167: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

How to Read this Manual

Symbols

In this manual, the following symbols are used:

R WARNING:This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result indeath or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are de-scribed in the Safety Information section of the “Copy Reference” manual.

R CAUTION:This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injurywhen you misuse the machine without following the instructions under thissymbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the SafetyInformation section of the “Copy Reference” manual.* The statements above are notes for your safety.

ImportantIf this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might bedamaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.

PreparationThis symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-erating.

NoteThis symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misop-eration.

LimitationThis symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.

ReferenceThis symbol indicates a reference.

[ ]Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.

{ }Keys built into the machine's operation panel.

iii

Page 168: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTSManuals for this Machine.......................................................................... 1

Machine Types........................................................................................... 2

Additional Functions Provided by Internal Options............................... 3Copy Mode.................................................................................................... 3Facsimile Mode (Option) ............................................................................... 3Printer Mode (Option).................................................................................... 4

1.Modes

Changing Modes........................................................................................ 5

Multi-access............................................................................................... 6

Copy Mode ................................................................................................. 9Changing to Copy Mode ............................................................................... 9

Facsimile Mode........................................................................................ 10Changing to Facsimile Mode....................................................................... 10Sending a Fax ............................................................................................. 10Printing a Received Fax .............................................................................. 10

Printer Mode............................................................................................. 11Changing to Printer Mode ........................................................................... 11Printing ........................................................................................................ 11

2.User Tools (System Settings)

Keys for User Tools (System Settings) ................................................. 13

Accessing the User Tools (System Settings) ....................................... 14Exiting from the User Tools......................................................................... 15Printing the Counter Value .......................................................................... 15

User Tools Menu (System Settings) ...................................................... 16

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools .................................... 17System Settings 1/5 ..................................................................................... 17

System Settings 2/5 ..................................................................................... 18

System Settings 3/5 ..................................................................................... 19

System Settings 4/5 ..................................................................................... 21

System Settings 5/5 ..................................................................................... 22

INDEX........................................................................................................ 24

Page 169: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Manuals for this Machine

This is a multi-functional machine combining copier, printer and fax functions.This manual describes procedures common to these functions. A separate man-ual is provided for each function. Please consult the manual that suits yourneeds.

❖ System Settings (this manual)Provides an overview of the machine. This manual introduces the functionsof the machine. It also introduces the options allowing you to use additionalfunctions and describes how to access the system user tools to make the ma-chine easier to use.

❖ Copy ReferenceDescribes the various copying functions from basic copying to more ad-vanced functions such as reducing/enlarging copies or combining originalsinto one copy.• Copy Quick Guide

Explains the most frequently used copy functions with examples. Alsocontains information such as the direction in which to set your originalsand copying direction.

❖ Fax Reference (Option)Describes the operational procedures and functions to use the machine forfaxing.• Fax Quick Guide (Option)

Explains the most frequently used fax functions with examples. Also con-tains information on how to enter letters and symbols.

❖ Printer Reference (Option)Describes the system settings, procedures and functions for using this ma-chine as a printer.

1

Page 170: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

2

Machine Types

This machine comes in two models which vary in copy speed. To make surewhich model you have, see the inside front cover.

Type 1 Type 2

Copy speed 22 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)

27 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)

Fax unit Option Option

Printer unit Option Option

Page 171: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Additional Functions Provided by Internal Options

You can expand the capabilities of this machine to include fax functions andprinter functions. When you want to add a function, contact your sales or servicerepresentative.

Copy Mode

In copy mode you can make basic copies and also copy using more sophisticatedtechniques, such as reduction/enlargement or combining several originals ontoone copy. You can install an optional memory expansion for storage of documentimages, thereby making the best use of memory with various copy functions.

Options for Memory Expansion

❖ 48MB copier memory unitIncreases memory capacity, allowing you to increase the number of storageof originals.

Facsimile Mode (Option)

You can send and receive fax messages in facsimile mode. Installation of optionalexpansion memory allows more functions to be used, and more data to be stored.

Options for Facsimile Feature

❖ Expansion Memory (Option)Increases memory capacity, allowing you to store more originals for transmis-sion and received images. Also allow sending/receiving in super fine mode.

❖ Fax Function Upgrade Unit (Option)Allows faster communication between super G3 machines with the JBIG fea-ture. Also increases the number of memory available for personal codes,groups, speed dials, memory files, special senders, etc.

❖ ISDN Unit (Option)Allows you to send and receive messages using the ISDN (Integrated ServiceDigital Network).

❖ Extra G3 Interface Unit (Option)Adds another G3 line.

❖ PC-FAX Expander (Option)By installing a PC-FAX Expander, you can use this machine as a scanner, aPC-FAX modem and a convenience printer.

3

Page 172: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

4

Printer Mode (Option)

Installation of optional expansion memory allows more data to be stored.

Options for Printer Feature

❖ Network Interface Board (Option)You can use this machine as a network printer with the following platformsand protocols:• NetWare, Windows 95/98/NT4.0 (TCP/IP, NetBEUI)• Macintosh (AppleTalk).

❖ PostScript3 Kit (Option)This machine can be used as a PostScript level 3 printer.

❖ Printer Hard Disk (Option)You can install PostScript fonts on this hard disk. This allows for faster print-ing when printing complex documents containing several fonts.

❖ Printer Feature Expander (Option)You can print larger, more complex documents with this increase in memory.

Page 173: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

1. Modes

Changing Modes

Press the {Copy}, {Facsimile } or {Printer } key to switch to copy, fax or printermode respectively.

Limitation❒ You cannot switch modes in any of the following cases:

• When scanning in a fax message for transmission.• During immediate transmission.• When accessing the user tools.• During on hook dialing for fax transmission.• During interrupt copying.• During Energy Saver mode.

5

Page 174: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Modes

6

1

Multi-access

You can carry out another job using a different function while the current job isbeing performed.This allows you to handle your jobs efficiently regardless of how the machine isbeing used. For example:• While making copies, the machine can send a fax message that has been

stored in memory.• You can make copies while receiving fax data.• The machine can receive print data in any mode.Performing multiple functions simultaneously like this is called Multi-access.

Limitation❒ When paper longer than 313 mm, 12.3" is set in the optional finisher, or paper

is jammed in the optional staple unit, copies cannot be delivered to the finish-er tray. However, incoming faxes will still be printed and delivered to the in-ternal tray.

Note❒ You can choose which mode has highest priority for print jobs. The default is

“Copy”. See “16. Print Priority” in ⇒ P.21 “System Settings 4/5”.❒ When your machine is equipped with optional internal tray 2, you can specify

the tray used for each function so that completed documents are not mixed.For example, set one tray for faxes and another tray for copies. If you requireoptional internal tray 2, contact your local dealer or service representative.See “15. Output Tray Prio.” in ⇒ P.21 “System Settings 4/5”.

-Sample operationsThis chart is based on the following conditions:• “16. Print Priority” is set to “Interleave” (See “16. Print Priority” in ⇒ P.21

“System Settings 4/5”)• For details on operations under other conditions, contact your service repre-

sentative.

Page 175: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Multi-access

1

Mode after you select Copy Interrupt Copying

Facsimile Printer

Transmission Recep-tion

Print

Mode before you select C

opyi

ng

Sta

pli

ng

Sor

t

Op

erat

ion

Cop

yin

g

Tra

nsm

issi

on O

per

atio

n/

Man

ual

Rec

epti

on O

per

atio

nS

can

nin

g A

n O

rigi

nal

fo

r M

emor

y T

ran

smis

sion

Mem

ory

Tra

nsm

issi

on

Imm

edia

te T

ran

smis

sion

Mem

ory

Rec

epti

on

Pri

nti

ng

Rec

eive

d D

ata

Dat

a R

ecep

tion

Pri

nti

ng

Sor

t

Sta

pli

ng

Cop

y

Copying × × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩ ❍ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Stapling × × × ❍ ❍ *3 ❍ *1 ❍ *1 ✩ ❍ *1 ✩ ✩ *2 ✩ ✩ *2 ✩ *2 → *4

Sort × × × ❍ ❍ ❍ *1 ❍ *1 ✩ ❍ *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Inte

rrup

t Cop

ying Operation ❍ *5 ❍ *5 ❍ *5 × × ❍ *5 ❍ *5 ✩ ❍ *5 ✩ ❍ *5 ✩ ❍ *5 ❍ *5 ❍ *5

Copying ❍ *5 ❍ *5 ❍ *5 × × ❍ *5 ❍ *5 ✩ ❍ *5 ✩ ❍ *5 ✩ ❍ *5 ❍ *5 ❍ *5

Facs

imile

Transmission Operation/Manual Recep-tion Operation

❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Tra

nsm

issi

on

Scanning An Origi-nal for Memory Trans-mission

× × × × × × × ✩ × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Memory Trans-mission

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → × × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Immedi-ate Trans-mission

× × × × × × × × × × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Rec

epti

on

Memory Recep-tion

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ × × × ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

Printing Received Data

✩ ✩ *2 ✩ ❍ ❍ ✩ ✩ ✩ *6 ✩ *6 ✩ *6 → ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩

7

Page 176: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Modes

8

1

✩…means that these functions can be used together.❍…means that you can interrupt the current job with Function keys or the {In-terrupt } key to proceed to a subsequent job.→…means that another job will automatically start after the current job is fin-ished.×…means that you must manually start another job after the current job is fin-ished (i.e. these functions cannot be used together).

*1 Simultaneous operations are only available after all copy originals have beenscanned and copying is in progress.

*2 If you make stapled copies on paper larger than A4, 81/2" × 11" with the optional fin-isher, the subsequent operation is disabled until the current job is finished.

*3 If you make stapled copies on paper larger than A4, 81/2" × 11" with the optional fin-isher, the Output Tray is automatically changed to “Internal Tray”.

*4 If the current operation is taking a long time, reception memory may become full anddata reception may not be possible.

*5 If Interrupt Copy is selected, the functions cannot scan or print.*6 During parallel reception, any subsequent job is disabled until all receptions are

completed.*7 When stapling sizes larger than A4, 81/2" × 11" and you have selected the “Auto

Start” setting displayed immediately after copying starts, processing takes place au-tomatically after staple printing has finished.

*8 When stapling sizes larger than A4, 81/2" × 11", output is delivered to the internaltray.

*9 Depending on the size of the print data and scanned image, the machine may run outof memory and dual operations may not be possible.

Prin

ter

Data Recep-tion

✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → →

Prin

t

Printing ✩ ✩ *2 ✩ ❍ ❍ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → →

Sort ✩ ✩ *2 ✩ ❍ ❍ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ → → → →

Stapling ✩ → *8

✩ *2 *8 *9

❍ ❍ *3 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 → → → →

Mode after you select Copy Interrupt Copying

Facsimile Printer

Transmission Recep-tion

Print

Mode before you select C

opyi

ng

Sta

pli

ng

Sor

t

Op

erat

ion

Cop

yin

g

Tra

nsm

issi

on O

per

atio

n/

Man

ual

Rec

epti

on O

per

atio

nS

can

nin

g A

n O

rigi

nal

fo

r M

emor

y T

ran

smis

sion

Mem

ory

Tra

nsm

issi

on

Imm

edia

te T

ran

smis

sion

Mem

ory

Rec

epti

on

Pri

nti

ng

Rec

eive

d D

ata

Dat

a R

ecep

tion

Pri

nti

ng

Sor

t

Sta

pli

ng

Page 177: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Copy Mode

1

Copy Mode

Changing to Copy Mode

You can always make a copy whenthe machine isn't printing or scanninga fax data.

A Press the {Copy} key.

The copy display appears on thepanel display.

ReferenceFor details, see the “Copy Refer-ence”.

Interrupt copying to make urgently needed copies

You can interrupt the current copyingjob or printing of a received fax tomake a copy.

Important❒ If the remaining memory space is

0%, the machine fails to receive faxdata. Wait until the machine com-pletes printing a received fax, thenstart making copies.

Limitation❒ You cannot use the following func-

tions for interrupt copying:• Duplex• Combine• Sort/Staple

❒ You cannot use the interrupt copyfunction in the following cases:• during fax immediate transmis-

sion

• while scanning an original formemory transmission

• during interrupt copying

Note❒ Machine operations are different

depending “16. Print Priority” (See⇒ P.21 “System Settings 4/5”) or “18.Key Op. Tools” (See ⇒ P.22 “Sys-tem Settings 5/5”) settings.

A Press the {Interrupt } key.

If the machine is scanning origi-nals, it will immediately stop thescanning job. On the other hand, ifthe machine is performing a copyor print job, it will still continue thejob until you press the {Start}keyafter pressing the {Interrupt } key.When the current job stops, the in-terrupt copy display appears onthe panel display.

Note❒ When you interrupt a copying

job, remove the previous origi-nal.

BMake your copies.

C After interrupt copying is com-pleted, remove the original anddelivered copies.

D Press the {Interrupt } key again.

Resuming the interrupted copying job

A Reset the previous original.

B Press the {Start} key.

The machine resumes the inter-rupted copy run.

9

Page 178: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Modes

10

1

Facsimile Mode

Changing to Facsimile Mode

You can always use the machine forfaxing when you are not copying.

A Press the {Facsimile } key.

The fax display appears on thepanel display.

Note❒ The Memory Transmission/Re-

ception function is performedautomatically even when an-other function is being used.You need not switch the dis-play. When data is received inmemory, the Receive File indi-cator is lit.

ReferenceFor details, see the “Fax Refer-ence”.

Sending a Fax

Sending a fax while copying

A Press the {Facsimile } key to switchto the fax display.

Note❒ Remove any originals of your

copy job.

B Complete the usual operationsfor sending a fax, then press the{Start} key.

C After the transmission has fin-ished, press the {Copy}key.

D Reset the copy job originals, thenpress the {Start} key.

The machine resumes the inter-rupted copy run.

Sending a fax while printing

A Press the {Facsimile } key to switchto the fax display.

Printing is interrupted.

B Complete the usual operationsfor sending a fax, then press the{Start} key.

After the transmission has fin-ished, printing re-starts.

Printing a Received Fax

When you are not copying, a receivedfax is printed automatically. You donot need to switch to Facsimile mode.If you wish to print a received faxwhile copying, see below.

A Press the {Facsimile } key to switchto the fax display.

Copying is stopped and a receivedfax is printed automatically.

Note❒ Machine operations are differ-

ent depending “16.Print Priori-ty” (See ⇒ P.21 “System Settings4/5”) or “18.Key Op. Tools” (See⇒ P.22 “System Settings 5/5”) set-tings.

Page 179: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Printer Mode

1

Printer Mode

Changing to Printer Mode

Whenever you print from applica-tions, you do not have to switch toprinter mode. However, if you wishto cancel a print job, you need toswitch to printer mode.

A Press the {Printer } key.

The printer display appears on thepanel display.

ReferenceFor details, see the “Printer Ref-erence”.

Printing

The machine can receive a print datawhile any feature go on.

11

Page 180: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Modes

12

1

Page 181: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

2. User Tools (System Settings)

13

Keys for User Tools (System Settings)

❖ When the machine has the copier feature only

❖ When the machine has the printer or fax feature

1. {User Tools/Counter } key

2. Panel display

3.0 and 1 keys (Cursor keys)Press to select an item on the panel dis-play.

4. {Clear Modes } keyPress to clear the previously entered copyjob settings.

5. {Energy Saver } keyPress to switch to and from Energy Savermode.

6. {Interrupt } keyPress to make interrupt copies during acopy run.

7. Number keysUse to enter a numeric value.

8. {Clear/Stop } keyPress to delete a number you have en-tered or to stop copying.

9. {Start} keyPress to start copying or faxing.

10. Function keys (Fax or printer in-stalled machine only.)Press to change modes.

11. Operation switchPress this switch to turn the power on. Toturn the power off, press this switch again.

Page 182: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (System Settings)

14

2

Accessing the User Tools (System Settings)

This section is for the key operators incharge of this machine. You canchange or set the machine's defaultsettings.

PreparationAfter using the user tools, be sureto return to Copy mode.The settings are not canceled evenif the operation switch is turned offor the {Clear Modes } key is pressed.

ReferenceFor information on Copy, Fax, andPrinter User Tools, see the appro-priate reference manual.

A Press the {User Tools/Counter } key.

The User Tools Main Menu ap-pears.

B Enter {1} with the Numberkeys.

The system settings menu appears.

Note❒ Press the [Counter ] key to view

the total number of prints madeby the machine. See ⇒ P.15“Printing the Counter Value”.

❒ Press the [Language ] key toswitch the display language.

C Search for the desired menu withthe [↓Next] or [↑Prev. ] key. Thenenter its number with the Numberkeys.

Note❒ [↓Next]: Press to go to the next

page.❒ [↑Prev.]: Press to go back to the

previous page.

Reference⇒ P.16 “User Tools Menu (Sys-tem Settings)”

Page 183: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Accessing the User Tools (System Settings)

2

D Change the settings by followingthe instructions on the panel dis-play. Then press the [OK] key.

Reference⇒ P.17 “Settings You Can Changewith the User Tools”

Note❒ [OK]: Press to set the new set-

tings and return to the previousmenu.

❒ [Cancel ]: Press to return to theprevious menu without chang-ing any data.

Exiting from the User Tools

A After changing the user tools set-tings, press the [PrevMenu ] key.

B Press the [Exit ] key to return toCopy mode.

Printing the Counter Value

A Press the {User Tools/Counter } key.

B Press the [Counter ] key to view thetotal number of prints.

C Press the [Print ] key.

D Press the {Start} key.

15

Page 184: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (System Settings)

16

2

User Tools Menu (System Settings)

Page 185: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools

2

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools

ReferenceFor how to access the user tools, see ⇒ P.14 “Accessing the User Tools (SystemSettings)”.

System Settings 1/5

Menu Description

01. Function Priority You can specify the mode to be displayed immediately after the operation switch is turned on or System Reset mode is turned on.

Note❒ Default: Copier

02. Panel Tone The key tone sounds when a key is pressed.

This tone can be turned on or off.

Note❒ Default: On

03. Copy Count Display The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies made (count up) or the number of copies remaining to be made (count down).

Note❒ Default: Up (count up)

04. System Reset The machine returns to its prioritized mode automatically after your job is finished, after the selected time. This func-tion is called “System Reset”. The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, or no system reset.

Note❒ Default: On (60 seconds)

❒ You can specify the prioritized mode with the user tools. See “01. Function Priority” in ⇒ P.17 “System Settings 1/5”

17

Page 186: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (System Settings)

18

2

System Settings 2/5

Menu Description

05. Function Reset How long the machine waits before switching to the default mode if no operation has been performed after an operation has finished. The time can be set from 3 to 60, or Instant.

Note❒ Default: 10 seconds

06. Panel Off Timer The machine enters to Panel Off mode automatically after your job is finished, after the selected time. The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds, or off.

Note❒ Default: On (60 seconds)

07. Energy Saver Level You can select the Energy Saver level.

❖ Level 1• Power Consumption:

Reduced by about 40% compared standby mode.

• Warm-Up Time:about 15 seconds

❖ Level 2• Power Consumption:

Reduced by about 60% compared standby mode.

• Warm-Up Timeless than 30 seconds

This value applies to Type 1 (Copier features only).

Note❒ Default: Level 1

08. Energy Saver Timer The machine enters Low Power mode automatically after your job is finished, after the selected time. The time can be set from 1 to 240 minutes.

In Low Power mode, power consumption is reduced by 30% compared with Standby mode. This value applies to Type 1 (Copier features only).

Note❒ Default: 15 minutes

Page 187: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools

2

System Settings 3/5

Menu Description

09. Auto Off Timer The machine turns itself off automatically to conserve ener-gy after your job is finished, after the selected time. This function is called “Auto Off ”. The time can be set from 1 to 240 minutes.

Note❒ Default: 60 minutes

❒ Auto Off might not be effective when the machine is in the following conditions:

• An error message is displayed.

• The remaining memory space for fax mode is less than 100%.

• When originals set in the document feeder.

❒ To return to the ready condition from Auto Off, the ma-chine requires the same warm-up time as the time for be-coming ready after power is turned on.

❒ When the machine receives a fax or printer data in Auto Off mode, it automatically prints the fax or the printer data.

10. AOF(Keep It On.) Note❒ For details of this function, contact your service repre-

sentative.

11. Special Pap. Size Select the size of the copy paper set in the paper tray.

Note❒ If the specified paper size differs from the size of paper

actually set in the paper tray, a paper misfeed might oc-cur because the paper size is not detected correctly.

❒ The size of paper you can load in the LCT (Large Capac-ity Tray) is fixed depending on your locale. However, if you wish to switch from A4 to 81/2" × 11" or vice-versa, please contact your service representative.

• Metric version: A4K

• Inch version: 81/2" × 11"K

ReferenceSee “Changing The Paper Size” in the “Copy Refer-ence”.

19

Page 188: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (System Settings)

20

2

12. Pap.Tray Priority (for Copy mode only)

You can select the paper tray which will be selected as a de-fault in the following conditions:

• When the operation switch is turned on.

• When System Reset or Auto Reset mode is turned on.

• When the {Clear Modes } key is pressed.

• When Auto Paper Select mode is not selected.

1: Tray 1

2: Tray 2

3: Tray 3

4: Tray 4

1: Tray 1

2: Tray 2

3: Tray 3 (LCT)

Note❒ Default: Tray 1

❒ Tray 3, Tray 4, and LCT (Large Capacity Tray) are op-tions.

Menu Description

Page 189: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools

21

2

System Settings 4/5

Menu Description

13. Auto Tray Switch (for copy mode only)

If you load paper of the same size in two or more trays, the machine automatically shifts another tray when the tray in use runs out of paper. You can set or cancel this setting.

Note❒ Default: On

❒ If you put special paper in paper trays using the Special Paper Indicate menu, the Auto Tray Switch function is available to these trays only when their settings are iden-tical.

ReferenceSee “14. Special Pap. Indict” in ⇒ P.21 “System Settings 4/5”

14. Special Pap. Indict When recycled paper or special paper is in the paper trays, the paper type can be indicated on the panel display.

Note❒ Default: No Display

❒ “Recycled Paper” appears on the panel display when re-cycled paper is selected, and “Special Paper” appears when special paper is selected.

15. Output Tray Prio. You can specify a tray to which documents are delivered for each mode (copier, fax and printer).

1: Finisher

2: Internal Tray

3: Internal Tray2

Note❒ You can specify a single tray for two or more modes.

❒ You can have messages received on a specific line deliv-ered to the internal tray 2 (1 bin tray). Refer to “Chang-ing the User Parameters” in the Fax Reference.

Page 190: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

User Tools (System Settings)

22

2

System Settings 5/5

16. Print Priority (set-ting the multi-accessing function)

Sets the print priority for each mode.

• “Display”Print priority is given to the mode displayed on the dis-play.

• “Copier”Print priority is given to the copy function.

• “Fax”Print priority is given to the fax function.

• “Printer”Print priority is given to the printer function.

• “Interleave”Prints jobs in the order in which they are initiated re-gardless of mode/function.

Output from each function might be mixed. If you want to avoid such mixing, specify an independent tray for each feature using “Output Tray Prio.”. When using different functions, attaching internal tray 2 allows you to specify an independent tray for each function. If you want to attach one, contact your local dealer.

Note❒ Default: Copier

Reference⇒ P.6 “Multi-access”

“15. Output Tray Prio.” in ⇒ P.21 “System Settings 4/5”

Menu Description

17. Display Contrast You can adjust the brightness of the panel display.

18. Key Op. Tools

Use to view or print counters, and set up user codes.

Reference“Key Op. Access”

1 Show/Print Counter View or print counters by function.

2 Print CounterList Print all counters.

Menu Description

Page 191: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Settings You Can Change with the User Tools

2

3 Key Op. Access Turn user codes on or off.

Note❒ Default: Off

4 Prog. Key Op. Code Register/change the Key Operator Code (8 digits).

5 Restricted Access Restrict user access using optional key counter.

Note❒ Default: Off

Menu Description

23

Page 192: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

24 UE USA A267

INDEXA

Auto Off Timer, 19Auto Tray Switch, 21

C

Clear Mode key, 13Clear/Stop key, 13Contrast, 22Copy Count Display, 17Copy Mode, 1, 3, 9Cursor keys, 13

E

Energy Saver Timer, 18

F

Facsimile Mode, 1, 3, 10Function Priority, 17Function Reset, 18

I

Interrupt copying, 9

K

Keys for User Tools (System Settings), 13

M

Modes, 5Multi-Access, 6

N

Number keys, 13

O

Output Tray, 21

P

Panel Display, 13Panel Off Timer, 18Panel Tone, 17Paper Tray Priority, 20Print Priority, 22

S

Special Paper Indicate, 21Special Pap. Size, 19System Reset, 17

U

User Tools/Counter key, 13User Tools (System Settings), 13

Page 193: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

1. BasicsHow to Make Copies ..................................................................... page2

2. Reduce/EnlargeCopying to Different Copy Paper Sizes ............................................ page4

3. DuplexMaking 2-Sided Copies from 1-Sided Originals ............................... page6

4. Tray 2Copying onto Non-standard Paper from Tray 2 ............................... page8

5. CombineCombining Originals into 1 Copy .............................................page10

6. Stamp/Page NumberingStamping Messages and Page Numbers on Copies ....................page12

7. OHP Slip SheetInserting OHP Slip Sheets .........................................................page14

8. StaplingStapling While Copying.............................................................page16

9. Features at a Glance ...................................page18

This machine comes in two models which are referredto in this manual as Type 1 and Type 2. Check theinside front cover of the Copy Reference for the modelyou have before reading this guide.

Some limitations may apply to functions for detailsplease refer to the Copy Reference.

COPY QUICK GUIDE

Page 194: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

2

How to Make CopiesBasics

Useful FunctionsYou can make copies without having to worry about paper size and image density since they arechosen automatically.

lllllAuto Image DensityAutomatically selects the image density.

lllllAuto Paper SelectAutomaticaliy selects a suitable size of copy paper.

Set the original.

In the Document FeederOn the Exposure Glass

Face - down Face - up

Tip

Make sure thatA:[Auto] is selected.B:[100%] is displayed.C:The Auto Image Density Auto Image Density Auto Image Density Auto Image Density Auto Image Density

indicator is lit.

Page 195: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

3

es

Enter the number

of copies with theNumber keys.

Press the StartStartStartStartStartkey.

Never Forget!

Press the Clear ModesClear ModesClear ModesClear ModesClear Modes key toclear previously entered settings.

*To check selectedmodes, press theCheck ModesCheck ModesCheck ModesCheck ModesCheck Modes key.

A B C

Page 196: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

4

Copying to Different Copy Pa p

You wish to reduce or enlarge different sizeoriginals onto a certain size copy paper.

In this situation ...This machine can choose an appropriate reproduc-tion ratio based on the paper and original sizesyou select (Auto Reduce/Enlarge).

EnlargingEnlargingEnlargingEnlargingEnlarging

ReducingReducingReducingReducingReducing

Example:

5 / " 1 2

8 / " 1 2

11"

8 / " 1 2

11" 14" 17"

8 / " x 11" 1 2

5 / " x 1 2 8 / " 1

2

8 / " x 14" 1 2

11" x 17"

Copy Paper Size

You can check the copypaper size using the scaleon the exposure glass.

Set the original.

Reduce/Enlarge

Press the [Auto R/E][Auto R/E][Auto R/E][Auto R/E][Auto R/E]key.

Use this function:

Tip

11"x17"8 " x 11"

5 " x 8 "

11"x17"

8 " x 11"

Page 197: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

5

Press the StartStartStartStartStartkey.

opy Paper Sizes

In addition, the following functions are available:Preset Reduce/EnlargePreset Reduce/EnlargePreset Reduce/EnlargePreset Reduce/EnlargePreset Reduce/EnlargeZoomZoomZoomZoomZoomDirectional Size Magnification(inch)Directional Size Magnification(inch)Directional Size Magnification(inch)Directional Size Magnification(inch)Directional Size Magnification(inch)Directional Magnification(%)Directional Magnification(%)Directional Magnification(%)Directional Magnification(%)Directional Magnification(%)For details, please read the Copy Reference.

Select 8 "x11"copy paper withthe keys.

Page 198: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

6

Making 2-Sided Copies fr o

Set the originalsin the documentfeeder. Make sureyou set them in thecorrect direction.

The optional duplex unit is required to use this function.

You wish to reduce output volume.

In this situation ...

Use the Duplex function to copy onto bothsides of paper.

If you get the orientationwrong, copies will bedelivered upside down.

1. Identify the top ofthe original.

2. Set the original in the documentfeeder as shown below.

Don't set the originallike this.

Duplex

Use this function:

Tip

Press the [Duplex][Duplex][Duplex][Duplex][Duplex]key and make surethat [1 Sided [1 Sided [1 Sided [1 Sided [1 Sided ] ] ] ] ]is selected.

Page 199: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

7

Select theorientation.

Press the StartStartStartStartStartkey.

es from 1-Sided Originals1. Press the [ Orientn.Orientn.Orientn.Orientn.Orientn.] key. 2. Select [ TTTTTop to Bottomop to Bottomop to Bottomop to Bottomop to Bottom] with the

keys.3. Press the [OK][OK][OK][OK][OK] key.

Top tobottom

Top totop

Page 200: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

8

Copying onto Non-standard Pa pTray 2

Useful Functions

You can set the thin paper, thick paper, transparencies in tray 2.

Set the original.

*If you cannot find your desiredpaper size, select “ ”.For details, see above right.

Pull out tray 2and insert thecopy paper.

Set the paper sizeselector to the newpaper size.

When you set thethin paper, thick papertransparencies, push theswtich-over lever to right.

Page 201: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

9

ard Paper from Tray 2

Push the papertray in until itstops.

Tip

Setting Non-standard Size Paper in Tray 2

Press the StartStartStartStartStartkey.

*When you set standerdpaper in Tray2, push theswitch-over lever to left.

1. Set the paper size selectorto “ ”.

2. Select Tray 2 with the key. Then press the # key.

3. Press the [Pap.Size] key.

5. If you cannot find yourdesired paper size, select[Custom Size:], then pressthe [OK] key.

8. Press the [Exit] key.

7. Press the [Pap.Type] key.Then select the paper typeand press the [OK] key.

4. Select your desired papersize with the or key. Then press the [OK]key. Go to step 7.

6. Enter the horizontal andvertical size. Then pressthe [OK] key.

Page 202: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

10

Combining Originals in t

Set the originalsin the documentfeeder.

You wish to save paper or cut downon filing space.

In this situation ...The machine can copy multiple 1-sidedoriginals onto 1 sheet of copy paper.

Setting the Originals in the Document Feeder

4321

4321

Originals reading from left to right

4321

1 22 1

(4) (3)

Originals reading from top to bottom

* Set the originals upside down.

Example:

Combine

43

1 2

2 31

4

Use this function:

Tip

Press theCombineCombineCombineCombineCombine/Series/Series/Series/Series/Series key.

Press the[Combine][Combine][Combine][Combine][Combine] key.

Page 203: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

11

Combining multiple 1-sided originals into one 2-sided copies

als into 1 Copy4 pages

2-sided copy

8 pages

2-sided copy

16 pages

2-sided

copy85 6 7

1 42 3

1613 14 15

9 1210 11

21

1615

The optional duplex unit is required.<Front> <Back>

<Front> <Back>

2 31

4

3

1

4

2

Press the [Exit][Exit][Exit][Exit][Exit]key.

Press the StartStartStartStartStartkey.

Select[4 Orig. ] withthe keys thenpress the [OK][OK][OK][OK][OK] key.

Select the copypaper withthe keys.

Page 204: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

12

Stamping Messages and P a

You wish to have page numbers ora message (e.g.CONFIDENTIAL)printed on copies.

In this situation ...Use the Preset Stamp function. You can selectthe following phrases. • CONFIDENTIAL • COPY • URGENT • PRIORITY • For your Information • PRELIMINARY •For Internal Use Only.To print page numbers, use the Page Numberingfunction.You can choose from the following numberingformats: • P1, P2 · · · • 1/5, 2/5 · · · • – 1 –, – 2 – · · ·

Set the originals.

Stamp/pageNumbering

Use this function:

Press theStampStampStampStampStamp key.

Press the[[[[[PresetPresetPresetPresetPreset]]]]] key and Selectyour desired phrase. Thenpress the [OK] key.

Press the[Position][Position][Position][Position][Position] key.

Page 205: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

13

and Page Numbers on Copies

Press theStartStartStartStartStart key.

Change stampposition with the keys.Then press the [OK] key twice.

Select the format of thenumbering with the keys.Then press the [OK] key.

Enter start page, start No.and total pages with theNumber Keys. Then pressthe [OK] key twice.

Press the[P[P[P[P[Page no.]age no.]age no.]age no.]age no.] key.

Page 206: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

14

In this situation ...

Press theCover/OHP SlipCover/OHP SlipCover/OHP SlipCover/OHP SlipCover/OHP SlipSheetSheetSheetSheetSheet key.

Use this function:

Press the[OHP Slip] key.

Set theoriginalsin the documentfeeder.

Specifywhether to copy on to OHP slipsheets with the keys. Thenpress the [OK] key and then pressthe [Exit] key.

OHP SlipSheet Inserting OHP Slip S h

Use the OHP Slip Sheet function to insertslip sheets. You can also copy the sameoriginal image onto the slip sheets.

You wish to insert slip sheets betweenOHP transparencies.

Page 207: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

15

Press theStartStartStartStartStart key.

Select the slipsheet tray.

Tip

Before you use this function, you need to specify “Tray 2” or “Bypass” as the OHPtransparencies tray.For details, refer to the Copy Reference.* If your machine does not have the bypass tray, only “Tray 2” can be selected.* If your machine has the bypass tray, “Bypass” is selected by default.

Set the OHPtransparencies onthe bypass tray ortray 2.

lip Sheets

Page 208: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

16

Stapling While Copying

You don’t have time to staple eachcopy set together by hand.

In this situation ...If your machine has thefinisher, each copy setcan be stapled togetherautomatically.

Press the[Sort/Staple][Sort/Staple][Sort/Staple][Sort/Staple][Sort/Staple] key.

Stapling

Use this function:

Press the [Staple][Staple][Staple][Staple][Staple]key.

Set the originalsin the documentfeeder.

The optional finisher is required to use this function.

Page 209: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

17

ing

Press the [OK][OK][OK][OK][OK]key.

Enter thenumber ofcopies with theNumber keys.

Press theStartStartStartStartStart key.

Orientation of the original Copies

Tip

Page 210: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

18

For details, please refer to the following pages in the Copy Reference.

Features at a Glance

UE USA A267

Page 211: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

19

Page 212: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

A267-6707UE USAPrinted in Japan

Make copies of this manual andstick them on the wall.

Set this manualface down on theexposure glass.

Press the [Start][Start][Start][Start][Start] key.

Stick the copies on thewall.

Page 213: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Network Interface BoardType185–E

(Option)

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for futurereference.For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.

Page 214: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Introduction

To get maximum use from this machine, all operators should carefully read and follow the instructionsin this manual.

Please read the Safety Information in the “Copy Reference” that comes with the printer before usingthis machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIP-MENT PROBLEMS.

Important

Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liablefor direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operatingthe machine.

Note

The names of the applications do not appear in the following pages. Confirm which applications youwill be using before reading this manual.

Software Versions Conventions Used in this Manual

• NetWare3.x means NetWare 3.11, 3.12 and 3.2.

• NetWare4.x means NetWare 4.1, 4.11 and IntranetWare.

Trademarks

Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer,Inc.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the UnitedStates and/or other countries.

Netscape, Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation.

Novell, NetWare, Client32, NDS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.

PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.

Sun is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

SunOS is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of theirrespective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.

Note

The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:

• Microsoft Windows 95 operating system

• Microsoft Windows 98 operating system

• Microsoft Windows for Workgroups operating system Version 3.11

• Microsoft Windows NT Server network operating system Version 4.0

• Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system Version 4.0

Descriptions in this manual Application

PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINIS-TRATOR

Aficio Manager for Admin

PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT Aficio Manager for Client

Page 215: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

i

TABLE OF CONTENTSIntroduction................................................................................................ 1

Setting Up the Printer in a Network ......................................................... 2Printing without Using a Print Server ............................................................ 2Printing with a Windows NT Print Server ...................................................... 3Printing as a NetWare Print Server ............................................................... 4

1.Windows 95/98 Configuration

Configuring Windows 95/98 ..................................................................... 7Preparing to Use the TCP/IP Protocol for Printing ........................................ 8Preparing to Use the NetBEUI Protocol for Printing...................................... 9Installing the Multi Direct Print Application .................................................. 10Setting Up the Printer Driver ....................................................................... 11Uninstalling the Multi Direct Print Application.............................................. 13

2.Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

Preparing for a Network Connection..................................................... 15Preparing to Use the TCP/IP Protocol for Printing ...................................... 16Preparing to Use the NetBEUI Protocol for Printing.................................... 18Installing the Multi Direct Print Application .................................................. 19Setting Up the Printer Driver ....................................................................... 20Uninstalling the Multi Direct Print Application.............................................. 22

Setting up a Client Computer ................................................................. 23Windows 95/98............................................................................................ 23Windows NT 4.0.......................................................................................... 24

Configuring LPR Port Printing ............................................................... 25

3.NetWare Configuration

Installing the NIB Setup Tool.................................................................. 27Installing the PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR..................... 27Running the NIB Setup Tool ....................................................................... 28

Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard..................................... 29

NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings .......................................................... 32Setting Up as Print Server........................................................................... 32Setting Up as Remote Printer ..................................................................... 35

NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings ...................................................... 38Setting Up as Print Server........................................................................... 38Setting Up as Remote Printer ..................................................................... 41

Setting Up a Client Computer................................................................. 45Windows95/98............................................................................................. 45Windows 3.1x.............................................................................................. 46

Page 216: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

ii

4.Macintosh Configuration

Configuring Macintosh ........................................................................... 49Changing to EtherTalk ................................................................................ 49Configuring the Printer ................................................................................ 50Changing Printer Name............................................................................... 50Changing Zone............................................................................................ 51

5.Appendix

Multi Direct Print...................................................................................... 53[Select Printer ] ............................................................................................... 54[Network ] ...................................................................................................... 55

Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser .......... 56Going to the Top Page ................................................................................ 57

Assigning IP Address with ARP+PING.................................................. 59

Remote Maintenance by Telnet (mshell) ............................................... 60Operation Flow............................................................................................ 60Command List ............................................................................................. 61

SNMP ........................................................................................................ 68

Understanding the Displayed Information............................................ 69Print Job Information ................................................................................... 69Print Log Information................................................................................... 70Network Statistical Information.................................................................... 71Configuring the Network Interface Board .................................................... 72

Message List ............................................................................................ 75System Log Information .............................................................................. 75

Precautions.............................................................................................. 80Connecting a dial up router to a Network.................................................... 80When Printing PostScript from Windows .................................................... 81When print it with NetWare ......................................................................... 81When Using DHCP ..................................................................................... 82When using the NIB Setup Tool.................................................................. 83

Network Configuration Page .................................................................. 84

Specifications .......................................................................................... 86

INDEX........................................................................................................ 87

Page 217: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

1

Introduction

This manual contains detailed instructions on configuring your printer for usingas a network printer. The actual procedures may differ depending on your net-work environment. Use the procedures for your network environment.

Important❒ The procedures written in this manual assume that you are a network admin-

istrator. If you aren't, be sure to consult your network administrator beforeconfiguration.

ReferenceRefer to the manual that comes with the printer for information on physicallyinstalling the Network Interface Board and cabling.Refer to the manual that comes with the printer for information on configur-ing the Network Interface Board with the Operation panel.

❖ Features• Support for 100BASE-TX and 10BASE-T• The Network Interface Board is compatible with NetWare (IPX/SPX),

Windows NT (TCP/IP, NetBEUI), Windows 95/98 (TCP/IP, NetBEUI) ,and Macintosh (AppleTalk) protocols. This allows you to use the printer ina network that uses different protocols and operating systems.

• A computer used as dedicated print server is not required, because theNetwork Interface Board can be configured as a NetWare print server.

• The Network Interface Board can connect the printer to the network with-out requiring its own power supply because the Network Interface Boardis installed inside the printer.

NetWare (Server)

Windows NT (Server)

Windows 95/98

Macintosh

NetWare(Client)

Windows NT

Page 218: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

2

Setting Up the Printer in a Network

Printing without Using a Print Server

You don't have to use a print server. The actual procedure differs depending onyour operating system.

• Windows 95/98⇒ P.7• Windows NT 4.0⇒ P.15• Macintosh⇒ P.49

Windows 95/98

Macintosh

TCP/IPNetBEUI

TCP/IPNetBEUI

AppleTalk

Windows NT4.0

Page 219: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

3

Printing with a Windows NT Print Server

When Windows NT Server or Workstation is the operating system being usedon the print server, TCP/IP or NetBEUI protocols are used.

Note❒ For instructions on setting up TCP/IP or NetBEUI in a Windows NT environ-

ment, refer to P.15 “Preparing for a Network Connection”.❒ Client setup instructions are different for each type of Windows OS.

• Windows 95/98⇒ P.23• Windows NT 4.0⇒ P.24

Windows NT Server (or Workstation) 4.0Print Server

Windows 95/98 Windows NT4.0

TCP/IPNetBEUI

Page 220: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

4

Printing as a NetWare Print Server

The Network Interface Board allows you to set up your printer in a NetWare en-vironment as either a print server or a remote printer. A dedicated NetWareprint server is not required. If a dedicated print server is being used, your printershould be configured as a remote printer.

❖ Configure as Print Server

Note❒ The actual procedures for configuring your printer may differ depending on

the version of NetWare. • NetWare 3.x⇒ P.32• NetWare 4.x, 5⇒ P.38

❒ The actual procedures for configuring your client computer may differ de-pending on the operating system.• Windows 95/98⇒ P.45• Windows 3.1x⇒ P.46

NetWareFile Server

Print Server

Windows 95/98 Windows 3.1x

Page 221: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

5

❖ Configure as Remote Printer

Note❒ The actual procedures for configuring your printer may differ depending on

the version of NetWare. • NetWare 3.x⇒ P.35• NetWare 4.x, 5⇒ P.41

❒ The actual procedures for configuring your client computer may differ de-pending on the operating system.• Windows 95/98⇒ P.45• Windows 3.1x⇒ P.46

NetWarePrint Server

NetWareFile Server

Remote Printer

Windows 95/98 Windows 3.1x

Page 222: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

6

Page 223: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

7

1. Windows 95/98Configuration

You can use your printer as a network printer with Windows 95 and Windows98 using the Multi Direct Print application, and TCP/IP or NetBEUI protocols.This chapter explains how to configure your printer and Windows.

Configuring Windows 95/98

PreparationThe Multi Direct Print Application supports the TCP/IP protocol and theNetBEUI protocol. Consult the network administrator before selecting theprotocol.

Limitation❒ When you use the NetBEUI protocol, you cannot print to a printer which is

located on the other side of a router.

Note❒ You can use both TCP/IP and NetBEUI protocols in a computer. To use both

protocols you must first install them.

Basic Procedure

Installing the Multi Direct Print

Configuring Windows environment

Assigning the IP address

TCP/IP NetBEUI

Selecting the protocol

Installing the printer driver

Changing the port

TCP/IPNetBEUI

Windows 95/98

Page 224: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Windows 95/98 Configuration

8

1

Preparing to Use the TCP/IP Protocol for Printing

To use the TCP/IP protocol to print, the network must be configured as de-scribed below.

Configuring the Printer

Configure your printer to use the TCP/IP protocol.• Confirm that the TCP/IP protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is ac-

tive)• Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP

protocol.

ReferenceFor more information on how to make the above settings, refer to the Operat-ing Instructions for your printer.If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, refer to P.82 “When Using DHCP”.

Note❒ After setting the IP address, use the PING command to confirm that it has

been set correctly.A Click [Start ], point to [Programs ], and then click [MS-DOS Prompt ].B Input the following. (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)

C:> ping 192.168.15.16If the address has been configured correctly, the following message ap-pears.Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message ap-pears.Request timed out.

Configuring a Windows 95/98 computer

Follow these steps to configure a Windows 95/98 computer to use the TCP/IPprotocol.

A Double-click the [Network ] icon of [Control Panel ], and confirm that “TCP/IP”is in the [The following network components are installed ] box of [Configuration ]tab.

Note❒ If TCP/IP is not installed, click [Add ] of [Configuration ] tab, and install it. For

more information, refer to the Windows 95/98 online help.

Page 225: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Configuring Windows 95/98

9

1

B Configure the TCP/IP protocols with the appropriate IP address, subnetmask and other settings.

Confirm with the network administrator that the settings are correct.

Preparing to Use the NetBEUI Protocol for Printing

To use the NetBEUI protocol to print, the network must be configured as de-scribed below.

Configuring the Printer

Configure your printer to use the NetBEUI protocol.• Confirm that the NetBEUI protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is

active.)

ReferenceFor more information on how to make the above settings, refer to the Operat-ing Instructions for your printer.

Configuring a Windows 95/98 computer

Install the NetBEUI protocol into a Windows 95/98 computer, and configureNetBEUI as the default protocol.

A Double-click the [Network ] icon in the [Control Panel ], and confirm that “Net-BEUI” is in the [The following network components are installed ] list of [Configura-tion ] tab.

Note❒ If NetBEUI is not installed, click [Add ] of [Configuration ] tab, and install it.

For more information, refer to the Windows 95/98 online help.

B Configure the NetBEUI protocol as the default protocol. Click the [Configu-ration ] tab, select “NetBEUI” in the [The following network components are in-stalled ] list, and click [Properties ]

C Click the [Advanced ] tab, select [Set this protocol to be the default protocol ], andclick [OK].

D Click [OK], to close the [Network ] dialog.

E After confirming the message to restart, click [Yes].

Page 226: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Windows 95/98 Configuration

10

1

Installing the Multi Direct Print Application

Follow these instructions to install Multi Direct Print.

PreparationYou must restart the computer after installing Multi Direct Print. Be sure toclose all applications before beginning the installation process.

Note❒ You must install Multi Direct Print and the appropriate printer driver in order

to print. If you print, using the TCP/IP protocol, to be able to browse theprinter via the network, PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT (⇒refer to theinside of the front cover of this manual) needs to be installed. If the installerstarts automatically with the AutoRun program, you can install both of theseprograms. For more information on how to install these programs, refer to theOperating Instructions for your printer.

A Insert the CD-ROM that comes with the printer into your computer's CD-ROM drive.

Note❒ If the installer starts automatically, you can use it to install Multi Direct

Print, and set up the printer driver, and then go to procedure F.

B Open [Control Panel ], and double click the [Add/Remove Programs ] icon.

C In the [Install/Uninstall ] tab, click [Install ].

D Click [Next >].

E Input the name of the CD-ROM drive in the [Command line for installation pro-gram ] box, followed by “:\NETWORK\MDP\DISK1\SETUP” (do not in-clude the quotation marks), and then click [Finish ].

Note❒ An example would be “D:\NETWORK\MDP\DISK1\SETUP” when the

drive letter is “D”.

F After the [Welcome ] dialog appears, click [Next >].

G After the [Setup Complete ] dialog appears, click [Yes, I want to restart my comput-er now. ], and click [Finish ].

The computer restarts, and Multi Direct Print can now be used. If you select“No”, be sure to restart the computer manually before launching Multi DirectPrint for the first time.Go to P.11 “Setting Up the Printer Driver” after the computer restarts.

Page 227: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Configuring Windows 95/98

11

1

Setting Up the Printer Driver

Using Multi Direct Print to print is not possible until the printer driver is in-stalled and the correct port selected.

PreparationThe target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process.

A Install the printer drivers.

If the printer drivers have already been installed, you can proceed to the nextstep.

ReferenceFor more information, refer to the Operating Instructions for your printer.

Note❒ Any port can be selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recom-

mended.

B In the [Printers ] window, highlight the icon of the printer you want to useby clicking it. On the [File ] menu, click [Properties ].

C Click the [Details ] tab, and then click [Add Port ].

D In the [Add Port ] box, click [Other ], and select [RICOH Multi Direct Print ] by click-ing it, and then click [OK]The [Select Printer ] dialog appears, and the printers which can print with TCP/IP are displayed.

Limitation❒ If PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT is not installed in your computer,

printers which can print with TCP/IP are not displayed.

Note❒ The printers which have replied to a broadcast from the computer are list-

ed here. To print to a printer that is not on this list, or to directly input theport name, highlight [New Printer ] by clicking it, and click [Next >], and theninput the port name with procedure G.

E To print using the NetBEUI protocol, click [NetBEUI].

Page 228: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Windows 95/98 Configuration

12

1

F Select the printer you want to use by clicking it, and click [Next >].

ReferenceIf you want to know more about a particular item in the dialog, refer toP.53 “Multi Direct Print”.

Note❒ You can identify the “Printer Name” and “Address” on the “configuration

page” printed by the printer.

G Confirm that the Port name of the printer is correct, and click [Next >].

If you did not select a printer with procedure F, you must enter the Port name.

Inputting the Port name for use with the TCP/IP protocol

A Input the IP address of the Network Interface Board into the [IP address ]box.

You can input the host name or a domain name instead of an IP addressinto the [Host Name ] box.

Limitation❒ You cannot use a host name that begins with “%%”.

Note❒ When you use DHCP to assign IP addresses to Network Interface

Boards, you can use a printer name (Current Hostname on the networkconfiguration page) as the host name.

Inputting the port name for use with the NetBEUI protocol

A Print a configuration page, and confirm the Network path name.

ReferenceFor information on printing a configuration page, refer to the OperatingInstructions for your printer.

B Input the printer's Network path name in form of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Do not input “\\” as head characters but “%%”.

H Confirm the port name in the [Port Name ] box, and click [Finish ].

I Confirm that the port name is displayed in the [Print to the following port ] box,and click [OK].

Configuration is complete.When you print, the printing procedure is no different. When you select theprinter configured here, the computer automatically uses Multi Direct Print.

Page 229: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Configuring Windows 95/98

13

1

Uninstalling the Multi Direct Print Application

A Open [Control Panel ], and double click the [Add/Remove Programs ] icon.

BWith [Install/Uninstall ] tab, select [RICOH Multi Direct Print ] by clicking it, andclick [Add/Remove ].

C After a confirmation message appears, click [Yes].

UninstallShield removes all of the components of the Multi Direct Print appli-cation.

DWhen the uninstallation is complete, restart the computer.

Page 230: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Windows 95/98 Configuration

14

1

Page 231: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

15

2. Windows NT 4.0Configuration

You can use your printer as a network printer with Windows NT 4.0 using theMulti Direct Print application, and TCP/IP or NetBEUI protocols. This chapterexplains how to configure your printer and Windows NT.

Preparing for a Network Connection

PreparationThe Multi Direct Print Application supports the TCP/IP protocol and theNetBEUI protocol. Consult the network administrator before selecting theprotocol.

Limitation❒ When you use the NetBEUI protocol, you cannot print to a printer which is

located on the other side of a router.

Note❒ You can use both TCP/IP and NetBEUI protocols in a computer. To use both

protocols you must first install them.

Basic Procedure

Installing the Multi Direct Print

Configuring Windows environment

Assigning the IP address

TCP/IP NetBEUI

Selecting the protocol

Installing the printer driver

Changing the port

TCP/IPNetBEUI

Windows NT4.0

Page 232: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

16

2

Preparing to Use the TCP/IP Protocol for Printing

Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Win-dows NT to use the TCP/IP protocol.

Configuring the Printer

Configure your printer to use the TCP/IP protocol.• Confirm that the TCP/IP protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is ac-

tive)• Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP

protocol.

ReferenceFor more information on how to make the above settings, refer to the Operat-ing Instructions for your printer.If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, refer to P.82 “When Using DHCP”.

Note❒ After setting the IP address, use the PING command to confirm that it has

been set correctly.A Click [Start ], point to [Programs ], and then click [Command Prompt ].B Input the following. (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)

C:> ping 192.168.15.16If the address has been configured correctly, the following message ap-pears.Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message ap-pears.Request timed out.

Page 233: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Preparing for a Network Connection

17

2

Configuring a Windows NT Computer

Follow these steps to configure a Windows NT to use the TCP/IP protocol.

A Double-click the [Network ] icon of [Control Panel ], and confirm that “TCP/IPProtocol” is in the [Network protocols ] box of the [Protocols ] tab.

Note❒ If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Add ] in the [Protocols ] tab, and

install it. For more information, refer to the Windows NT online help.

B Configure the TCP/IP protocols with the appropriate IP address, subnetmask and other settings.

Confirm with the network administrator that the settings are correct.

C Click the [Services ] tab, and confirm that the “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” isinstalled.

If “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” is not installed, click [Add ] in the [ Services ]tab, and install it. For additional help in installing and configuring networkservices, refer to the Windows NT online help.

Page 234: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

18

2

Preparing to Use the NetBEUI Protocol for Printing

Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Win-dows NT to use the NetBEUI protocol.

Configuring the Printer

Configure your printer to use the NetBEUI protocol.• Confirm that the NetBEUI protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is

active.)

ReferenceFor more information on how to make the above settings, refer to the Operat-ing Instructions for your printer.

Configuring a Windows NT Computer

Install the NetBEUI protocol into a Windows NT computer, and enter the LANadapter number (Lana Number).

A Double-click the [Network ] icon in the [Control Panel ], and confirm that “Net-BEUI Protocol” is in the [Network protocols ] box of the [Protocols ] tab.

Note❒ If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Add ] in the [Protocols ] tab,

and install it. For more information, refer to the Windows NT online help.

B Change the Lana Number. Click the [Services ] tab, select the [NetBIOS inter-face] of the [Network Services ] box , and click [Properties ].

C Select the Lana Number corresponding [Nbf protocol ] of the [Network route ]headline, and click [Edit ].

D Input “0” as the Lana Number.

Note❒ If the other protocol's Lana Number is configured with “0”, you must

change the Lana Number a number other than “0”.

E Click [OK].

F Click [close ], and close the [Network ] dialog.

G After confirming the message for restart, click [Yes].

Note❒ When you change the Lana Number, You must restart.

Page 235: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Preparing for a Network Connection

19

2

Installing the Multi Direct Print Application

Follow these instructions to install Multi Direct Print.

PreparationYou must restart the computer after installing Multi Direct Print. Be sure toclose all applications before beginning the installation process.

Note❒ You must install Multi Direct Print and the appropriate printer driver in order

to print. If you print, using the TCP/IP protocol, to be able to browse theprinter via the network, PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT (⇒refer to theinside of the front cover of this manual) needs to be installed. If the installerstarts automatically with the AutoRun program, you can install both of theseprograms. For more information on how to install these programs, refer to theOperating Instructions for your printer.

❒ To install this software you must be logged on as a member of the Adminis-trators group.

A Insert the CD-ROM that comes with the printer into your computer's CD-ROM drive.

Note❒ If the installer starts automatically, you can use it to install Multi Direct

Print, and set up the printer driver, and then go to procedure F.

B Open [Control Panel ], and double click the [Add/Remove Programs ] icon.

C In the [Install/Uninstall ] tab, click [Install ].

D Click [Next >].

E Input the name of the CD-ROM drive in the [Command line for installation pro-gram ] box, followed by “:\NETWORK\MDP\DISK1\SETUP” (do not in-clude the quotation marks), and then click [Finish ].

Note❒ An example would be “D:\NETWORK\MDP\DISK1\SETUP” when the

drive letter is “D”.

F After the [Welcome ] dialog appears, click [Next >].

G After the [Setup Complete ] dialog appears, click [Yes, I want to restart my comput-er now. ], and click [Finish ].

The computer restarts, and Multi Direct Print can now be used. If you select“No”, be sure to restart the computer manually before launching Multi DirectPrint for the first time.Go to P.11 “Setting Up the Printer Driver” after the computer restarts.

Page 236: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

20

2

Setting Up the Printer Driver

Using Multi Direct Print to print is not possible until the printer driver is in-stalled and the correct port is selected.

PreparationThe target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process.

A Install the printer drivers.

If the printer drivers have already been installed, you can proceed to the nextstep.

ReferenceFor more information, refer to the Operating Instructions for your printer.

Note❒ Any port can be selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recom-

mended.

B In the [Printers ] window, highlight the icon of the printer you want to useby clicking it. On the [File ] menu, click [Properties ].

C Click the [Ports ] tab, and click [Add Port ].

D In the [Available Printer Ports ] box, highlight [RICOH Multi Direct Print ] by click-ing it, and then click [New Port ].

The [Select Printer ] dialog appears, and the printers which can print with TCP/IP are displayed.

Limitation❒ If PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT is not installed in your computer,

printers which can print with TCP/IP are not displayed.

Note❒ The printers which have replied to a broadcast from the computer are list-

ed here. To print to a printer that is not on this list, or to directly input theport name, highlight [New Printer ] by clicking it, and click [Next >], and theninput the port name with procedure G.

E To print using the NetBEUI protocol, click [NetBEUI].

F Select the printer you want to use by clicking it, and click [Next >].

ReferenceIf you want to know more about a particular item in the dialog, refer toP.53 “Multi Direct Print”.

Page 237: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Preparing for a Network Connection

21

2

Note❒ You can identify the “Printer Name” and “Address” on the “configuration

page” printed by the printer.

G Confirm that the Port name of the printer is correct, and click [Next >].

If you did not select a printer with procedure F, you must enter the Port name.

Inputting the Port name for use with the TCP/IP protocol

A Input the IP address of the Network Interface Board into the [IP address ]box.

You can input the host name or a domain name instead of an IP addressinto the [Host Name ] box.

Limitation❒ You cannot use a host name that begins with “%%”.

Note❒ When you use DHCP to assign IP addresses to Network Interface

Boards, you can use a printer name (Current Hostname on the networkconfiguration page) as the host name.

Inputting the port name for use with the NetBEUI protocol

A Print a configuration page, and confirm the Network path name.

ReferenceFor information on printing a configuration page, refer to the OperatingInstructions for your printer.

B Input the printer's Network path name in form of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Do not input “\\” as head characters but “%%”.

H Confirm the port name in the [Port Name ] box, and click [Finish ].

I In the [Printer Ports ] dialog, click [Close ].

J Confirm that the port name is displayed in the [Print to the following port(s) ]box and ' mark is inside the check box. And then click [OK].

Configuration is complete.When you print, the printing procedure is no different. When you select theprinter configured here, the computer automatically uses Multi Direct Print.

Page 238: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

22

2

Uninstalling the Multi Direct Print Application

A Open [Control Panel ], and double click the [Add/Remove Programs ] icon.

B In the [Install/Uninstall ] tab, select the [RICOH Multi Direct Print ] by clicking it,and click [Add/Remove ].

C After a confirmation message appears, click [Yes].

UninstallShield removes all of the components of the Multi Direct Print appli-cation.

DWhen the uninstallation is complete, restart the computer.

Page 239: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Setting up a Client Computer

23

2

Setting up a Client Computer

This section describes the procedures for setting up a client in a network thatuses Windows NT Server or Windows NT Workstation as a print server.

Note❒ Explanation of this section assumes that the client has already been config-

ured to communicate with a Windows NT print server. Do not proceed withthe following instructions until the client has been set up and configured cor-rectly.

Windows 95/98

To print from Windows 95/98, you must install the printer driver and changethe printer port to the print server.

A Install the printer driver as a local printer.

ReferenceFor more information, refer to the Operating Instructions for your printer.

Note❒ Any port can be selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recom-

mended.

B Click [Start ], point to [Settings ], and then click [Printers ].

C Select the icon of the printer you want to use by clicking it. On the [File]menu, click [Properties ].

D Click the [Details ] tab, and click [Add Port ].

Windows NT 4.0Print Server

Windows 95/98 Windows NT4.0

Page 240: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

24

2

E Click [Network ], and click [Browse ].

F On the network tree, double-click the name of the computer used as theprint server.

The printers attached to the network are displayed.

G Select the name of the printer you want to use by clicking it, and click [OK].

H Click [OK].

I Confirm that the port name is displayed in the [Print to the following port ] box,and click [OK].

Windows NT 4.0

Use the [Printers ] window to set up the printer.

A Click [Start ], point to [Settings ], and then click [Printers ].

B Double-click the [Add Printer ] icon.

This launches the Add Printer Wizard.

C Click [Network printer server ], and click [Next >].

D In the [Shared Printers ] box, double-click the name of the computer used as aprint server.

The printers attached to the network are displayed.

E Highlight the printer you want to use by clicking it, and click [OK].

Note❒ If the printer driver is not installed in the print server, a message appears.

If a driver has been installed on the client, click [OK], and follow the in-structions on the screen.

❒ There is a Windows NT printer driver in the CD-ROM that comes with theprinter.

F Select whether you use this printer as the default printer, and click [Next >].

G After installation is complete, click [Finish ].

The icon of the newly installed printer appears in the [Printers ] window.

Page 241: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Configuring LPR Port Printing

25

2

Configuring LPR Port Printing

This section explains the procedure for printing to a LPR port from WindowsNT.

PreparationThe TCP/IP protocols must be installed and configured correctly. Refer toP.16 “Preparing to Use the TCP/IP Protocol for Printing”, for more information.

Note❒ The following instructions assume that the printer drivers have already been

installed. This is a procedure to change the printer port to LPR.

A Click [Start ], point to [Settings ], and then click [Printers ].

B Select the icon of the printer you want to use by clicking it. On the [File]menu, click [Properties ].

C Click the [Ports ] tab, and then click [Add Port ].

D In the [Available Printer Ports ] box, select [LPR Port ] by clicking it, and thenclick [New Port ].

Note❒ If “LPR Port” does not appear, “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” has not been

installed.

E Input the IP address of the Network Interface Board into the [Name or ad-dress of server providing lpd ] box.

F Input “lp” into the [Name of printer or print queue on that server ] box, and click[OK].

G Click [Close ].

H Confirm that the port name is displayed in the [print to the following port(s) ]box and the ' mark is inside the check box. And then click [OK].

Page 242: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

26

2

Page 243: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

27

3. NetWare Configuration

This chapter describes how to configure your printer to use as a print server ora remote printer in a NetWare environment.

Note❒ NetWare must be set to active using the operation panel of your printer. For

information on how to set it, refer to the Operating Instructions for yourprinter.

Installing the NIB Setup Tool

A utility called the NIB Setup Tool is provided to configure your printer to workin a NetWare environment. Installing the PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMIN-ISTRATOR (⇒refer to the inside of the front cover of this manual) installs theNIB Setup Tool on your computer. This section describes how to install thePRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR, and how to run the NIB SetupTool.

Limitation❒ NetWare 3.x, 4.x or 5 must be functional to run the NIB Setup Tool.❒ The NIB Setup Tool is supported to work with the following operation sys-

tems.• Microsoft Windows 95/98• Microsoft Windows NT 4.0

Installing the PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR

Follow these steps to install the PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR.

PreparationYou should install the PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR onyour computer. If you install it on a file server and execute it via the network,it might not work correctly.Be sure to close all applications before starting the installation procedure.

A Insert the CD-ROM that comes with your printer into your computer's CD-ROM drive.

Note❒ If the installer starts automatically, you can use it to install the PRINTER

MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR, and go to procedure F.

Page 244: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare Configuration

28

3

B Open [Control Panel ], and double click the [Add/Remove Programs ] icon.

C In the [Install/Uninstall ] tab, click [Install ].

D Click [Next >].

E Input the name of the CD-ROM drive in the [command line for installationprogram] box, followed by “\NETWORK\PRINTMAN\AD-MIN\DISK1\SETUP” (do not include the quotation marks) and then click“Finish”.

Note❒ An example would be “D:\NETWORK\PRINTMAN\AD-

MIN\DISK1\SETUP” when the drive name is “D”.

F After the [Welcome ] dialog appears, click [Next >].

G The Software License Agreement appears.

After reading through all of the contents by clicking [PageDown ], click [Yes] toagree with the License Agreement.

H Select a directory in which it is to be installed, and click [Next >].

If you change the displayed directory, click [Browse ] to select another one.The installation program starts.After the confirmation dialog appears, the installation program is complete.

Running the NIB Setup Tool

A Click [Start ], point to [Programs ], and then click [NIB Setup Tool ] in the [NIB Set-up Tool ] program.

Page 245: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard

29

3

Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard

Using the NIB Setup Tool, you can easily set up a NetWare printing environ-ment after physically installing the Network Interface Board into the printer,You can select [Wizard ] or [Property Sheet ] as an installation method.When you configure the Network Interface Board for the first time, use the Wiz-ard method.

Limitation❒ When the Wizard method is used, the Network Interface Board is configured

to work as a Print Server. To configure it as a remote printer, use the PropertySheet method. For more information, refer to P.32 “NetWare 3.x - AdvancedSettings” and P.38 “NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings”.

Note❒ This section assumes that NetWare is functional and that the necessary envi-

ronment for the NetWare Print Services is available.❒ You should install the client software released from Novell on the Windows

before running the NIB Setup Tool for configuring in NDS mode or usingWindows NT 4.0.

A Log in to the file server as an Admin or Admin equivalent.

B Run the NIB Setup Tool.

Reference“Running the NIB Setup Tool” ⇒ P.28.

C Click [Wizard ] and click [OK].

The Browse dialog of the Network Interface Board appears.

D Click [IPX protocol ].

E Select the IPX address of the Network Interface Board you are configuringby clicking it, and click [Next >].

If you don't know which Network Interface Board you are configuring, printthe Configuration Page using the printer's operation panel, and select theMAC address that is on the page.

F Confirm that the MAC and IPX addresses are correct, and click [Finish ].

G Input the printer name into the [Device Name ] box.

The factory default is RNP followed by the last 6 digits of the MAC address.We recommend that you change it to something that is easier to remember orsomething based on the structure of your network.

Page 246: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare Configuration

30

3

H Input your comments in the [Comment ] box, and click [Next >].

The input comments are displayed with the device name when using a utilitysuch as PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR.

I In the dialog for selecting a network environment, place ' mark for [Net-Ware] and remove ' mark for the [TCP/IP].

J Click [Next >].

A dialog for configuring the NetWare environment appears.

K Select [Bindery Mode ] when printing under the Bindery mode, or select [NDSMode] when printing under the NDS mode.

When you are using NetWare version 4.x, 5, you can select [NDS Mode].

Note❒ In case of configuring NDS Mode, if the [NDS Mode] is unable to selected,

you need to check the version of the client software released from Novell.Recomended to install the latest version of the client software releasedfrom Novell.

L In the [File Server Name ] box, input the name of the file server in which aprint server is to be created.

Clicking [Browse ], you can select a file server among those listed in the Browsedialog.

M If you selected [NDS Mode], input the name of the NDS tree in which theprint server is created into the [NDS Tree] box, and input the context into the[NDS Context ] box.

Clicking [Browse ], you can select a NDS tree and a NDS context among thoselisted in the Browse dialogs.As a context, object names are input from a lower object and divided by a pe-riod. For example, if you want to create a file server into NETWORK underDS, input “NETWORK.DS”.

N Click [Next >].

O Input the name of the print server you are creating on the NetWare environ-ment into the [Print Server Name ] box.

The factory default name is already entered. You should change it if neces-sary.

P Input the name of the Printer into the [Printer Name ] box, and the name of thePrint Queue into the [Print Queue Name ] box.

The factory default for Printer Name is “Print Server Name” followed by “_1”and that for Print Queue Name is “Print Server Name” followed by “_Q”(quotation marks are not included). You should change them if necessary.

Page 247: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard

31

3

Q If you selected [NDS Mode], input the volume of the print queue into the[Queue Volume ] box.

Clicking [Browse ], you can select one of those shown in the Browse dialog.

R Click [Next >].

A dialog to confirm the printing environment appears.

S After confirming the environment, click [Next >].

If you want to change the settings, click [< Back ] and make the settings again.Clicking [Next > ], the NIB Setup Tool automatically creates the Print Server,the Printer, and the Print Queue on NetWare.

T After the confirmation dialog appears, select [Quit ] and click [Finish ] to exitthe NIB Setup Tool.

Page 248: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare Configuration

32

3

NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings

The actual procedures for configuring your printer differ depending on whetherthe Network Interface Board is configured as a print server or as a remote print-er. This section describes how to configure it in the NetWare 3.x environment.

PreparationThe following procedures use the Property Sheet method in configuring theNetwork Interface Board. If you configure the Network Interface Board as aNetWare print server for the first time after physically installing it, we recom-mend you use the Wizard method. For more information, refer to P.29 “QuickSetup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard”.

Note❒ This section assumes NetWare is functional and that the necessary environ-

ment for the NetWare Print Service is available.

Setting Up as Print Server

A Log in to the file server as a Supervisor or a Supervisor equivalent.

B Run the NIB Setup Tool.

Reference“Running the NIB Setup Tool” ⇒ P.28.

C Click [Property Sheet ] and click [OK].

The Browse dialog of the Network Interface Board appears.

D Click [IPX protocol ].

Installing the NIB Setup Tool

Print Server Remote Printer

Basic Procedure

Configuring the Network Interface Board

Configuring the NetWare

Turning the poweroff and on

Start the print server

Page 249: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings

33

3

E Select the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be con-figured by clicking it, and click [Next >].

Note❒ If you don't know which Network Interface Board you are configuring,

print the Configuration Page using the printer's operation panel, and selectthe MAC address that is on the page.

F Confirm that the MAC and IPX addresses are correct, and click [Finish ].

The [NIB Setup Tool ] window appears.

G Click [Configure ].

The property sheet appears.

H Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings.

A In the [Print Server Name ] box, input the name of the print server.

B In the [File Server Name ] box, input the name of the file server in which aprint server is to be created.

Click [Browse ] to select a file server among those listed in the Browse dia-log.

C In the [Print Server Operation Mode ] group, click [As Print Server ].

D Click [OK] to close the property sheet.

E After a confirmation dialog appears, click [OK].

I In the [NIB] menu, click [Exit ] to exit the NIB Setup Tool.

J Input “PCONSOLE” from the command prompt.

F:> PCONSOLE

K Create a print queue as follows.

Note❒ If you use a currently defined print queue, proceed to the step L.A In the [Available Options ] menu, select [Print Queue Information ].

B Press {Insert } and input a print queue name.

C Press {Esc} to return to the [Available Options ] menu.

Page 250: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare Configuration

34

3

L Create a printer as follows.

A In the [Available Options ] menu, select [Print Server Information ].

B To create a new print server, press {Insert } and input a print server name.

If you use an currently defined print server, select one of the print serversshown in the [Print Server ] list.

Important❒ Use the same name as that specified in the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H-A).

C In the [Print Server Information ] menu, select [Print Server Configuration ].

D In the [Print Server Configuration menu ], select [Printer Configuration ].

E Select the printer which is indicated as “Not Installed”.

F If you change the name of the printer, input a new name.

A name "Printer x" is assigned to the printer. x stands for the number of theselected printer.

G As Type, select [Remote Parallel, LPT1 ].

The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automat-ically configured.

H Press {Esc}, and click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog.

I Press {Esc} to return to the [Print Server Configuration Menu ].

M Assign print queues to the created printer as follows.

A In the [Print Server Configuration Menu ], select [Queues Serviced By Printer ].

B Select the printer created in the Step L.

C Press {Insert } to select a queue serviced by the printer.

Note❒ You can select more than one queue at a time.

D Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings.

When you have finished the above steps, make sure that the queues are as-signed.

N Press {Esc} until “Exit?” appears, and select [Yes] to exit PCONSOLE.

O Turn the printer power off and on.

Note❒ To confirm if the printer is configured correctly, enter as follows from the

command prompt.F:> USERLIST

❒ If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears asan attached user.

Page 251: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings

35

3

Setting Up as Remote Printer

A Log in to the file server as a Supervisor or a Supervisor equivalent.

B Run the NIB Setup Tool.

Reference“Running the NIB Setup Tool” ⇒ P.28.

C Click [Property Sheet ] and click [OK].

The Browse dialog of the Network Interface Board appears.

D Click [IPX protocol ].

E Select the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be con-figured by clicking it, and click [Next >].

Note❒ If you don't know which Network Interface Board you are configuring,

print the Configuration Page using the printer's operation panel, and selectthe MAC address that is on the page.

F Confirm that the MAC and IPX addresses are correct, and click [Finish ].

[NIB Setup Tool ] window appears.

G Click [Configure ].

The property sheet appears.

H Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings.

A In the [Print Server Name ] box, input the name of the print server.

B In the [File Server Name ] box, input the name of the file server in which aprint server is to be created.

Clicking [Browse ], you can select a file server among those listed in theBrowse dialog.

C In the [Print Server Operation Mode ] group, click [As Remote Printer ].

D In the [Remote Printer No. ] box, input the printer number.

Important❒ Use the same printer number as that to be created in the printer server.

E Click [OK] to close the property sheet.

F After a confirmation dialog appears, click [OK].

I In the [NIB] menu, click [Exit ] to exit the NIB Setup Tool.

Page 252: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare Configuration

36

3

J Input “PCONSOLE” from the command prompt.

F:> PCONSOLE

K Create a print queue as follows.

Note❒ If you use a currently defined print queue, proceed to the step L.A In the [Available Options ] menu, select [Print Queue Information ].

B Press {Insert } and input a print queue name.

C Press {Esc} to return to the [Available Options ] menu.

L Create a printer as follows.

A In the [Available Options ] menu, select [Print Server Information ].

B To create a new print server, press {Insert } and input a print server name.

If you use an currently defined print server, select one of the print serversshown in the [Print Server ] list.

Important❒ Use the same name as that specified in the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H-A).

C In the [Print Server Information ] menu, select [Print Server Configuration ].

D In the [Print Server Configuration menu ], select [Printer Configuration ].

E Select the printer which is indicated as “Not Installed”.

Important❒ Use the same number as that specified as Remote Printer No. using the

NIB Setup Tool. (Step H-D).F If you change the name of the printer, input a new name.

A name "Printer x" is assigned to the printer. x stands for the number of theselected printer.

G As Type, select [Remote Parallel, LPT1 ].

The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automat-ically configured.

H Press {Esc}, and click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog.

I Press {Esc} to return to the [Print Server Configuration Menu ].

Page 253: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings

37

3

M Assign print queues to the created printer as follows.

A In the [Print Server Configuration Menu ], select [Queues Serviced By Printer ].

B Select the printer created in the Step L.

C Press {Insert } to select a queue serviced by the printer.

Note❒ You can select more than one queue at a time.

D Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings.

When you have finished the above steps, make sure that the queues are as-signed.

N Press {Esc} until “Exit?” appears, and Select [Yes] to exit PCONSOLE.

O Start the print server by inputting as follows from the console of the Net-Ware Server.

If it is running, restart it after exiting it.

❖ To exitCAREE: unload pserver

❖ To startCAREE: load pserver print_server_name

Note❒ If the printer works as configured, “Waiting for job” appears.

Page 254: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare Configuration

38

3

NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings

The actual procedures for configuring your printer differ depending on whetherthe Network Interface Board is configured as a print server or as a remote print-er. This section describes how to configure it in the NetWare 4.x, 5 environment.

❖ To use NetWare 5• Load the IPX protocol into the file server in advance.• You cannot use the NDPS (Novell Distributed Print Services) mode.

PreparationThe following procedures use the Property Sheet method in configuring theNetwork Interface Board. If you configure the Network Interface Board as aNetWare print server for the first time after physically installing it, we recom-mend you use the Wizard method. For more information, refer toP.29 “QuickSetup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard”.

Note❒ This section assumes NetWare is functional and that the necessary environ-

ment for the NetWare Print Service is available.❒ You should install the client software released from Novell on the Windows

before running the NWAdmin.

Setting Up as Print Server

Important❒ You can set up the print server using the NDS or Bindery mode in NetWare

4.x, 5. The following procedure is for setting up the print server using theNDS mode in NetWare 4.1. When you set up the print server using the Bind-

Installing the NIB Setup Tool

Print Server Remote Printer

Basic Procedure

Configuring the Network Interface Board

Configuring the NetWare

Turning the poweroff and on

Start the print server

Page 255: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings

39

3

ery mode, use the NIB Setup Tool Wizard. ⇒ P.29 “Quick Setup Using the NIBSetup Tool Wizard”

A Log in to the file server as an Admin or an Admin equivalent.

B Run the NIB Setup Tool.

Reference“Running the NIB Setup Tool” ⇒ P.28.

C Click [Property Sheet ] and click [OK].

The Browse dialog of the Network Interface Board appears.

D Click [IPX protocol ].

E Select the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be con-figured by clicking it, and click [Next >].

Note❒ If you don't know which Network Interface Board you are configuring,

print the Configuration Page using the printer's operation panel, and selectthe MAC address that is on the page.

F Confirm that the MAC and IPX addresses are correct, and click [Finish ].

[NIB Setup Tool ] window appears.

G Click [Configure ].

The property sheet appears.

H Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings.

A In the [Print Server Name ] box, input the name of the print server.

B In the [File Server Name ] box, input the name of the file server in which aprint server is to be created.

Clicking [Browse ], you can select a file server among those listed in theBrowse dialog.

C In the [NDS Context ] box, input the context in which the print server is tobe created.

Clicking [Browse ], you can select a context among those listed in theBrowse dialog.

Note❒ Object names must be input from a lower level and divided by a period.

For example, if you want to create a file server into NETWORK underDS, input “NETWORK. DS”.

D In the [Print Server Operation Mode ] group, click [As Print Server ].

E Click [OK] to close the property sheet.

F After a confirmation dialog appears, click [OK].

Page 256: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare Configuration

40

3

I In the [NIB] menu, click [Exit ] to exit the NIB Setup Tool.

J From Windows, run NWAdmin.

Note❒ The actual NWAdmin programs differ depending on the version of it and

that of the operating system. Run the NWADMIN.EXE except the follow-ing cases. When you are using the NetWare 4.11 or higher on Windows3.1x, run the NWADMN3X.EXE. When you are using the IntranetWare onWindows95/98, run the NWADMN95.EXE. When you are using the Net-Ware 5, run the NWADMN32.EXE.

❒ The NWAdmin programs are located in the PUBLIC directory in the SYSvolume. The NWADMN95.EXE is located in the PUBLIC\WIN95 directo-ry. The NWADMN32.EXE is located in the PUBLIC\WIN32 directory.

❒ For more information on NWAdmin, see the documentation that comeswith the NetWare.

K Create a print queue as follows.

A Select the container object the print queue is located in among those inthe directory tree, and click [Create] in the [Object ] menu.

B In the [Class of new object ] box, click “Print Queue” to highlight it, andclick [OK].

C In the [Print Queue name ] box, input the name of the print queue.

D In the [Print Queue Volume ] box, click Browse button.

E In the [Available objects ] box, click the volume in which the print queue iscreated to highlight it, and click [OK].

Important❒ Select the volume on the file server specified in the NIB Setup Tool.

(Step H-B).F After confirming the settings, click [Create].

L Create a printer as follows.

A Select the container object the printer is located in, and click [Create ] inthe [Object ] menu.

B In the [Class of new object ] box, click “Printer” to highlight it, and click[OK]. When you are using the NetWare 5, click “Printer (Non NDPS)”.

C In the [Printer name ] box, input the name of the printer.

D Click [Define additional properties ] to place ' mark, and click [Create].

M Assign print queues to the created printer as follows.

A Click [Assignments ], and click [Add ] in the [Assignments ] group.

B In the [Available objects ] box, click the queue created in the step K to high-light it, and click [OK].

Page 257: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings

41

3

C Click [Configuration ], and in the [Printer type ] box, select [Parallel ] using thedropdown menu, and then click [Communication ].

D Click [Manual load ] in the [Communication type ] group, and click [OK].

E After confirming the settings, click [OK].

N Create a print server as follows.

A Select the context specified using the NIB Setup Tool (Step H-C), and inthe [Object ] menu, click [Create ].

B In the [Class of new object ] box, click “Print Server” to highlight it, andclick [OK]. When you are using the NetWare 5, click “Print Sever (NonNDPS)”.

C In the [Print Server name ] box, input the name of the print server.

Important❒ Use the same name as that specified using the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H-A).

D Click [Define additional properties ] to place ' mark, and click [Create].

O Assign the printer to the created print server as follows.

A Click [Assignments ], and click [Add ] in the [Assignments ] group.

B In the [Available objects ] box, click the queue created in the step L to high-light it, and click [OK].

C After confirming the settings, click [OK].

P Turn the printer power off and on.

Note❒ To confirm if the printer is configured correctly, enter as follows from the

command prompt.F:> NLIST USER /A/B

❒ If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears asan attached user.

Setting Up as Remote Printer

A Log in to the file server as Admin.

B Run the NIB Setup Tool.

Reference“Running the NIB Setup Tool” ⇒ P.28.

C Click [Property Sheet ] and click [OK].

The Browse dialog of the Network Interface Board appears.

Page 258: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare Configuration

42

3

D Click [IPX protocol ].

E Select the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be con-figured by clicking it, and click [Next >].

Note❒ If you don't know which Network Interface Board you are configuring,

print the Configuration Page using the printer's operation panel, and selectthe MAC address that is on the page.

F Confirm that the MAC and IPX addresses are correct, and click [Finish ].

[NIB Setup Tool ] window appears.

G Click [Configure ].

The property sheet appears.

H Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings.

A In the [Print Server Name ] box, input the name of the print server.

B In the [File Server Name ] box, input the name of the file server in which aprint server is to be created.

Clicking [Browse ], you can select a file server among those listed in theBrowse dialog.

C In the [NDS Context ] box, input the context in which the print server is tobe created.

Clicking [Browse ], you can select a context among those listed in theBrowse dialog.

Note❒ Object names must be input from a lower level and divided by a period.

For example, if you want to create a file server into NETWORK underDS, input “NETWORK. DS”.

D In the [Print Server Operation Mode ] group, click [As Remote Printer ].

E In the [Remote Printer No. ] box, input the number of the printer.

Important❒ Use the same number as that of the printer to be created in the print

server.F Click [OK] to close the property sheet.

G After a confirmation dialog appears, click [OK].

I In the [NIB] menu, click [Exit ] to exit the NIB Setup Tool.

Page 259: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings

43

3

J From Windows, run NWAdmin.

Note❒ The actual NWAdmin programs differ depending on the version of it and

that of the operating system. Run the NWADMIN.EXE except the follow-ing cases. When you are using the NetWare 4.11 or higher on Windows3.1x, run the NWADMN3X.EXE. When you are using the IntranetWare onWindows95/98, run the NWADMN95.EXE. When you are using the Net-Ware 5, run the NWADMN32.EXE.

❒ The NWAdmin programs are located in the PUBLIC directory in the SYSvolume. The NWADMN95.EXE is located in the PUBLIC\WIN95 directo-ry. The NWADMN32.EXE is located in the PUBLIC\WIN32 directory.

❒ For more information on NWAdmin, see the documentation that comeswith the NetWare.

K Create a print queue as follows.

A Select the container object the print queue is located in among those inthe directory tree, and click [Create] in the [Object ] menu.

B In the [Class of new object ] box, click “Print Queue” to highlight it, andclick [OK].

C In the [Print Queue name ] box, input the name of the print queue.

D In the [Print Queue Volume ] box, click Browse button.

E In the [Available objects ] box, click the volume in which the print queue iscreated to highlight it, and click [OK].

F After confirming the settings, click [Create].

L Create a printer as follows.

A Select the container object the printer is located in, and click [Create ] inthe [Object ] menu.

B In the [Class of new object ] box, click “Printer” to highlight it, and click[OK]. When you are using the NetWare 5, click “Printer (Non NDPS)”.

C In the [Printer name ] box, input the name of the printer.

D Click [Define additional properties ] to place ' mark, and click [Create].

M Assign print queues to the created printer as follows.

A Click [Assignments ], and click [Add ] in the [Assignments ] group.

B In the [Available objects ] box, click the queue created in the step K to high-light it, and click [OK].

C Click [Configuration ], and in the [Printer type ] box, select [Parallel ] using thedropdown menu, and then click [Communication ].

D Click [Manual load ] in the [Communication type ] group, and click [OK].

E After confirming the settings, click [OK].

Page 260: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare Configuration

44

3

N Create a print server as follows.

A Select the context specified using the NIB Setup Tool (Step H-C), and inthe [Object ] menu, click [Create ].

B In the [Class of new object ] box, click “Print Server” to highlight it, andclick [OK]. When you are using the NetWare 5, click “Print Sever (NonNDPS)”.

C In the [Print Server name ] box, input the name of the print server.

Important❒ Use the same name as that specified using the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H-A).

D Click [Define additional properties ] to place ' mark, and click [Create].

O Assign the printer to the created print server as follows.

A Click [Assignments ], and click [Add ] in the [Assignments ] group.

B In the [Available objects ] box, click the queue created in the step L to high-light it, and click [OK].

C In the [Printers ] group, click the printer assigned in the step B to high-light it, and click [Printer Number ].

D Input the printer number and click [OK].

Important❒ Use the same number as that specified as Remote Printer No. using the

NIB Setup Tool. (Step H-E).E After confirming the settings, click [OK].

P Start the print server by inputting as follows from the console of the Net-Ware Server.

If it is running, restart it after exiting it.

❖ To exitCAREE: unload pserver

❖ To startCAREE: load pserver print_server_name

Page 261: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Setting Up a Client Computer

45

3

Setting Up a Client Computer

This section describes how to set up a client computer when you use a NetWareprint server.

Note❒ This section assumes that the client has NetWare client applications installed

and is correctly configured to communicate with a NetWare print server. Ifnot, install necessary applications before starting the setting up procedure.

Windows95/98

Follow these steps to set up a Windows 95/98 client.

PreparationLog in to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure.

A Install the printer driver of the printer you want to use as “Local printer”.

ReferenceFor more information on installing the printer driver, refer to the Operat-ing Instructions for your printer.

Note❒ Any port is selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recommend-

ed.

B Click [Start ], point to [Settings ], and then click [Printers ].

C In the [Printers ] window, select the icon of the printer you want to use byclicking it.

D On the [File ] menu, click [Properties ].

E Click [Details ] tab, and click [Add Port ].

F Click [Network ] and click [Browse ].

G On the network tree, double-click the name of the computer used as theprint server.

The names of the printers attached to the network are displayed.

H Click the queue you want to print to highlight it, and click [OK].

I Click [OK].

In the [Print to the following port ] box, a network path to the printer appears.

J Click [OK] to close the printer's property, and again, open it.

Page 262: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare Configuration

46

3

K Click the [Printer Settings ] tab.

L Remove the ' marks from the [Form feed ] and the [Enable banner ] check box-es.

Note❒ You should not check these boxes, since they should be specified using the

printer driver. If they are checked, the printer might not print correctly.

When Using the PostScript Printer Driver

Follow these steps to set up for the PostScript Printer DriverA Click the [PostScript ] tab.

B Click [Advanced ].

C Remove the ' marks from the [Send CTRL+D before job ] and the [SendCTRL+D after job ] check boxes.

M Click [OK] to close the property.

Windows 3.1x

Follow these steps to set up a Windows 3.1x client.

A Install the printer driver of the printer you want to use as “Local printer”.

ReferenceFor more information on installing the printer driver, refer to the Operat-ing Instructions for your printer.

B Double-click the [Printers ] icon of [Control Panel ].

C In the [Installed Printers ] box, select the printer driver you want to use byclicking it, and then, click [Connect ].

D In the [Ports ] box, click [LPT1] to highlight it, and click [Network ].

The Network driver dialog appears.

E In the [Ports ] box, click [LPT1] to highlight it, and in the [Resources ]box, clickthe queue you want to print to highlight it.

Note❒ You should log in to the print server in order to see the print queues.

F Click [Capture ].

The specified queue is captured to the LPT1.

Page 263: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Setting Up a Client Computer

47

3

G Click [LPT Settings ].

The [NetWare Settings ] dialog appears.

H Remove the × marks from the [Form feed ] and the [Enable banner ] check boxes.

Note❒ You should not check these boxes, since they should be specified using the

printer driver. If they are checked, the printer might not print correctly.

I Click [OK] to close the [NetWare Settings ] dialog.

J Close the Network driver.

K Click [OK] to close the [Connect ] dialog.

L Click [Close ] to close the [Printers ] dialog.

Page 264: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

NetWare Configuration

48

3

Page 265: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

49

4. Macintosh Configuration

Configuring Macintosh

This chapter explains how to configure a network printer in a Macintosh Ether-Talk environment. The actual procedures to configure a network printer areslightly different depending on the version of the Mac OS. This chapter de-scribes how to configure your printer for Mac OS 8. If you are using a differentversion, refer to the manual that comes with your version of the Mac OS for moreinformation.

Limitation❒ To print from a Macintosh, the optional PostScript 3 is required.

Changing to EtherTalk

Follow these steps to configure a Macintosh computer to use EtherTalk.

ReferenceFor information on installing the software required for EtherTalk, refer to theMacintosh manuals.

A Open [Control Panels ], and double-click the [AppleTalk ] icon.

B Select “Ethernet” from the [Connect via ] pop-up menu.

C If you change zones, select a name from the [zone] pop-up menu.

D Close the [AppleTalk ] control panels.

E Restart the Macintosh.

Changing to EtherTalk

Basic Procedure

Configuring the printer

Changing printer name

Changing zone

Page 266: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Macintosh Configuration

50

4

Configuring the Printer

Use the operation panel to activate the EtherTalk protocol (factory default is ac-tive).

ReferenceFor information on configuration, refer to the Operating Instructions for yourprinter.

Changing Printer Name

If the network has several same model printers, the names will be the same.Printers that have the same name will have their names changed slightly in theChooser. For example, three printers named “printer” will appear in the chooseras “printer0”, “printer1” and “printer2”. Use applications such as Apple Printer Utility or LaserWriter Utility to changeprinter names in the Macintosh EtherTalk environment. These utilities are dis-tributed by Apple Computer, Inc.

Page 267: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Configuring Macintosh

51

4

Changing Zone

It may be necessary to change the zone configuration. Use applications such as Apple Printer Utility or LaserWriter Utility to changethe zone configuration in the Macintosh EtherTalk environment. These utilitiesare distributed by Apple Computer, Inc.

Note❒ If your Macintosh is configured to use TCP/IP, you can change the zone con-

figuration with a Web browser. ⇒ P.56 “Configuring the Network InterfaceBoard with a Web Browser”

Follow these steps to use the Apple Printer Utility.A Insert the CD-ROM that comes with the printer into your computer's CD-

ROM drive.B Copy the “Zone Name.ps” file in the “Zone Name” folder to the hard disk.C Open the copied “Zone Name ps” file using a text editor, and change the

“NewZone” , which is in the second line from the bottom, to the name of thenew zone.%!PS-Adobe2.0 %%Title: Changing Zone (EtherNet only)%%CreationDate: Tue Dec 16 1997%%EndCommentstrue 0 startjob not {ERROR}if(%EtherTalk%) << /EtherTalkZone (NewZone) >> setdevparams%%EOF

D Save the “Zone Name.ps”.E Run the Apple Printer Utility, and select the printer for which the new zone

name is to be used.F Select the [Send PostScript File ] in the [Utilities ] menu, and send the “Zone

Name.ps” to the printer.

Page 268: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Macintosh Configuration

52

4

Page 269: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

53

5. Appendix

Multi Direct Print

Multi Direct Print is a Windows program that allows you to print on a Peer-to-Peer network. This program allows you to print directly to a network printer,even if there is no print server.

Note❒ If your printer is in the middle of warming up or printing, an error message

might appear a certain time after you request a print job. You can change howlong the printer should wait to display the message by clicking [Port Settings ]in the [Details ] tab on Windows 95/98, and [Configure Port ] in the [Ports ] tab onWindows NT4.0.

OS Protocol stack

Microsoft Windows 95/98 The Microsoft version of TCP/IP that comes with Windows.

The Microsoft version of NetBEUI that comes with Windows.

Microsoft Windows NT 4.0

Page 270: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

54

5

[Select Printer ]

A list of available printers appears on this screen. This example is for the Englishversion.

1. Printer NameThe contents of this list are different forTCP/IP and NetBEUI protocols.If you selected [TCP/IP], the printer nameof the Network Interface Board ap-peared. If you selected [NetBEUI], thecomputer name of the Network InterfaceBoard appeared.

Note❒ The printer name can be found on the

printer configuration page.❒ The printer name is set to “RNP” and

the last 6 digits of the MAC address ofthe Network Interface Board. For ex-ample, a board with a MAC address of00:00:74:62:5C:65, would be namedRNP625C65. You can change thisname to something more convenient.

2. AddressThe contents of this list are different forTCP/IP and NetBEUI protocols.If you selected [TCP/IP], the printer nameof the Network Interface Board ap-peared. If you selected [NetBEUI], the

computer name of the Network InterfaceBoard appeared.

Note❒ The form of the Network path name is

“%% computer name \ name of print-er type”.

3. CommentComments that are registered on the Net-work Interface Board.

4. [Refresh ]Click to refresh the contents of the dis-play. When refreshing, the name of thisbutton changes to [Stop ]. Click on it tostop the refresh.

5. [About ]Version and copyright information.

6. ProtocolSelect to display the printers which canprint using the selected protocol.

1

6

4

2 3

5

Page 271: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Multi Direct Print

55

5

[Network ]

When you select a printer with the [Select Printer ] dialog, the Port name is inputautomatically. These examples are for the English version.

1. Host nameIf you print, using the TCP/IP protocol,to select a printer using a host name or adomain name, input the name here. In-put the IP address into the [IP address ]box when selecting a printer by IP ad-dress.

Limitation❒ You cannot use a host name that

begins with “%%”.

Note❒ When you use DHCP to assign IP ad-

dresses to Network Interface Boards,you can use a printer name (CurrentHostname on the network configura-tion page) as the host name.

2. IP addressIf you print, using the TCP/IP protocol.Input the IP address of the printer.

3. Printer nameInput the printer's Network path name inform of “%%Computer name \Sharename”. Do not input “\\” as head char-acters but “%%”.

1 32

❖ TCP/IP ❖ NetBEUI

Page 272: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

56

5

Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser

The Network Interface Board functions as a Web server in addition to allowinga printer to function as a network printer. You can use a Web browser to viewthe printer status and configure the Network Interface Board.

❖ Configuring the PrinterThis facility requires TCP/IP to be installed. After the printer has been con-figured to use the TCP/IP protocol, it will be possible to adjust the settingsusing a web browser.

ReferenceFor information on configuring the printer to use TCP/IP, refer to the Op-erating Instructions for your printer.

❖ Operating System Browser Requirements

Limitation❒ Using Windows NT 3.51 with Internet Explorer 3.02 may cause problems.❒ Sometimes after clicking [Back ] , the previous page may not appear. In this

case, click [Refresh ] or [Reload ] .❒ The text on the screen may disappear or be aligned incorrectly if the font

size settings of the browser are set to be too large. It is recommended thatyou use a font size equal to or smaller than “10 point” with Netscape Nav-igator, and “Medium” or smaller with Internet Explorer.

OS Browser

Microsoft Windows 95/98

Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.02/4.0

Netscape Navigator 3.0/4.0

Microsoft Windows NT 3.51/4.0

Mac OS 7.6.1 ∼ 8.1

Solaris 2.5 ∼ 2.6

Page 273: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser

57

5

Going to the Top Page

After launching your Web browser, enter the IP address of the printer. See theexample below. This example is for the English version.http://192.168.15.16/

(In this example. the IP address of the Network Interface Board is 192.168.15.16.)

Note❒ If a DNS server is used in the network, you can enter the host name as an URL.

For example, http://webmonitor.netprinter.com/. In order to do this, youmust the register the IP address and host name of the Network InterfaceBoard with the DNS server. Consult the network administrator for informa-tion on how to do this.

❒ If the network uses proxy servers, the browser may run slowly.

1. Header ButtonYou can register favorite URLs with[URL]. To view the help section, click[Help].

Important❒ It costs to use the browser to access

a website.

Note❒ The help file is stored on the CD-ROM

in HTML format.

2. Menu ButtonButtons to configure the Network Inter-face Board and confirm the status of theprinter.

Note❒ When you click [Network Config ], a dia-

log appears requesting the user nameand password. Input only the pass-word in this dialog. The factory de-fault password is “password”.

❒ The password is the same as that usedin the remote maintenance (mshell)and that used in the NIB Setup Tool. Ifyou change a password on the Webbrowser, the other passwords are alsochanged.

3. Representation AreaDisplays the name and comments of theNetwork Interface Board, and the statusof the printer.

1

2

3

Page 274: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

58

5

-Linking the address (URL) to the [Help] buttonYou can link the address (URL) of the [Help] button to the help files on your com-puter or on a Web server.A Copy the help file on the CD-ROM to the desired location. The help files are

located in folders labeled with abbreviated language names. For example, En-glish help files are in the "EN" folder. Be sure to copy the entire "EN" folder tothe new location.

B Using a web browser, navigate to the Top Page and click [Network config ].C Input your password, (it is not necessary to enter a user name) and click [OK].D Input the path to the help file in the [Help URL ] box.

If you copied the help file to "C:\HELP\EN" then enter "file://C:/HELP/".For example if you copied the file to a web server and the address (URL) thatwill be linked to the help files is "http://a.b.c.d/HELP/EN/index.html", en-ter "http://a.b.c.d/HELP/".

E Click [Apply ].When a warning message appears, select to continue configuring this proce-dure.

Page 275: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Assigning IP Address with ARP+PING

59

5

Assigning IP Address with ARP+PING

Using TCP/IP, you can assign the IP address using ARP and PING. The follow-ing example is for a BSD UNIX workstation (SunOS 4.x).

PreparationARP+PING should be set to active in the network boot configuration beforeassigning the IP address using ARP+PING. For how to set it to active, refer tothe Operating Instructions for your printer.

A Log in to the workstation as root.

B Use the arp command to assign the IP address to the MAC address of theNetwork Interface Board.

# arp -s 192.168.15.16 00:00:74:62:5C:65

Note❒ 192.168.15.16 is the IP address, 00:00:74:62:5C:65 is the MAC address.

C Assign the IP address using the PING command.

# ping 192.168.15.16

D Use the PING command again, to confirm the address.

# ping 192.168.15.16

If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears.192.168.15.16 is alive

If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message ap-pears.no answer from 192.168.15.16

-How to Confirm the MAC AddressThe MAC address (Ethernet address) of the Network Interface Board is requiredin order to use ARP and PING to assign the IP address.The MAC address can be seen on the printer configuration page.

ReferenceFor more information on printing a configuration page, refer to the OperatingInstructions for your printer.

Page 276: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

60

5

Remote Maintenance by Telnet (mshell)

You can view the printer status and configure the network interface board usingtelnet.

Note❒ You should specify a password so that only the network administrator, or a

person having network administrator privileges, can use remote mainte-nance (mshell).

Operation Flow

The following is a sample procedure in using Telnet.

Limitation❒ Only one person at a time can be logged on to do remote maintenance.

A Using the IP address or host name of the printer, start telnet.

% telnet IP_address

Note❒ In order to use the host name instead of the IP address, you must write it

to the /etc/hosts file.

B Input the password.

Note❒ The factory default is “password”.

C Input a command.

Reference For information on telnet commands, refer to P.61 “Command List”.

D Finish telnet.

msh> logout

When the configuration is revised, a confirmation message requests whetheror not the changes should be saved.

E Input “yes” to save the changes, and press {Enter}.If you do not want to save the changes, input “no”and press {Enter}. If youwant to make additional changes, input “return” at the command line, andpress {Enter}.

Note❒ If the “Can not write NVRAM information” message appears, the changes

are not saved. Repeat the steps above.

Page 277: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Remote Maintenance by Telnet (mshell)

61

5

❒ The Network Interface Board is reset automatically when the settings arechanged.

❒ When the Network Interface Board is reset, the active print job which hasalready been sent to the printer, will finish printing. However, jobs that ha-ven't been sent yet will be cancelled.

Command List

This is a list of commands that can be used via remote maintenance.

Note❒ Input “help”, to see a list of commands that can be used.

msh> help

❒ Input “help command_name”, to display information on the syntax of thatcommand.msh> help command_name

TCP/IP Address

Use the ifconfig command to configure TCP/IP (IP address, subnet mask, broad-cast address, default gateway address).

❖ Referencemsh> ifconfig

❖ Configurationmsh> ifconfig le0 parameter address

The following is an example for configuring an IP address of 192.168.15.16.msh> ifconfig le0 192.168.15.16

The following is an example for configuring a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.msh> ifconfig le0 netmask 255.255.255.0

Note❒ This affects the configuration of the Network Board of the IP address that is

used.❒ To input an address using hexadecimal, add “0x” to the first command.

Parameter Configuration Item

(no parameter) IP address

netmask subnet mask

gateway default gateway address

Page 278: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

62

5

-Address

❖ Subnet MaskA number used to mathematically “mask” or hide the IP address on the net-work by eliminating those parts of the address that are alike for all the ma-chines on the network.

❖ Default Gateway AddressA gateway is a connection or interchange point that connects two networks.A gateway address is for the router or host computer used as a gateway.

Note❒ To get the above addresses, contact your network administrator.

Access Control

Use the access command to view and configure access control.

❖ Referencemsh> access

❖ Configurationmsh> access parameter address

Note❒ The Access Control Address and the Access Control Mask are used to limit

access to the computer used for printing by denying access to users based ontheir IP address. If it is not necessary to limit access, set the Access ControlMask to “0.0.0.0”.

❒ When the Access Control Address matches masked result of the IP addresscomputer attempting to print, print jobs from that IP address can be acceptedby the Network Interface Board.

❒ For example, if you assign 192.168.15.16 as the Access Control Address to theNetwork Interface Board, the combination of the Access Control Mask andthe IP addresses that can print are as follows. The XXX is a variable thatmeans any number from 1 to 255 is acceptable.

Parameter Configuration Method

control Access Control Address

mask Access Control Mask

Access Control Mask IP addresses that can access the printer

0. 0. 0. 0 XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Page 279: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Remote Maintenance by Telnet (mshell)

63

5

Network Boot

Use the set command to configure a network boot.msh> set parameter {on | off}

“On” means active and “Off” means inactive.

Note❒ When you use RARP+TFTP, BOOTP, DHCP, the server also needs to be con-

figured.❒ DHCP takes precedence over all other settings.

255. 0. 0. 0 192.XXX.XXX.XXX

255.255. 0. 0 192.168.XXX.XXX

255.255.255. 0 192.168. 15.XXX

255.255.255.255 192.168. 15. 16

Parameter Configuration Method

ping ARP+PING

tftp RARP+TFTP

bootp BOOTP

dhcp DHCP

Access Control Mask IP addresses that can access the printer

Page 280: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

64

5

Protocol

Use the set command to allow/prevent remote access for each protocol.msh> set protocol {up | down}

Note❒ If you prohibit remote access using TCP/IP and then logout, you cannot use

remote access. If this was a mistake, you can use the printer operation panelto allow access by TCP/IP.

❒ When you prevent access via TCP/IP, you are also prevented from using lpr,ftp, rsh, diprint, and web.

Status of Printer

The following commands can be used to get information about the current statusof the printer.msh> command

Note❒ More information on the print job is displayed when the ID number is added

after the prnlog command.

Protocol

appletalk

tcpip

netware

netbeui

lpr

ftp

rsh

diprint

web

“Up” means active and “Down” means inactive.

Command Information that is displayed

status Status of printer.

Information about the print job.

info Information about the paper tray, output tray, emulation and program of printer.

prnlog [ID] Lists the last 10 print jobs.

netstat Information on the Network Interface Board.

Page 281: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Remote Maintenance by Telnet (mshell)

65

5

ReferenceFor more information on the meaning of the data returned with these com-mands, refer toP.72 “Configuring the Network Interface Board”.

Information about the Network Interface Board Configuration Settings

Use the show command to display the Network Interface Board configurationsettings.msh> show [-p]

Note❒ Add “-p” to the show command to have the information displayed one screen

at a time.

ReferenceFor more information on the meaning of the data returned with this com-mand, refer to P.72 “Configuring the Network Interface Board”.

System Log Information

Use the syslog command to display information stored in the printer's systemlog. msh> syslog

ReferenceFor more information on the displayed information, refer to P.75 “System LogInformation”.

SNMP

Use the snmp command to display and edit SNMP configuration settings suchas the community name.

Note❒ You can configure from No. 1 to 10 SNMP settings.❒ The factory default settings for No. 1 and 2 are as follows.

Number 1 2

community name public admin

IP address 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

access type read-only

trap off

read-write

trap off

Page 282: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

66

5

❖ DisplayShows the SNMP information and available protocols.msh> snmp ?msh> snmp [-p] [ registered_number ]

Note❒ If the -p option is added, you can view the displays one by one.❒ If the registered number is not added, you can view the status of all the reg-

istered numbers.

❖ Community name configurationYou can set the community name of the Network Interface Board.msh> snmp number name community_name

Note❒ The community name must consist of 15 characters or less.

❖ Access type configurationYou can select the access type from those listed below.msh> snmp number type access_type

❖ Protocol configurationYou should use the following command to set the protocols to active or inac-tive. If you set a protocol to inactive, you cannot use all the registered num-bers for it.msh> snmp {ip | ipx} {on | off}

• “On” means active and “Off” means inactive

If you want to change the protocol settings for each registered number, usethe following command. Make sure that the protocol set to inactive using theabove command, cannot set to be active using this command.msh> snmp number active {ip | ipx} {on | off}

❖ Access ConfigurationYou can configure an address of a host depending on the protocols used. The Network Interface Board accepts requests only from hosts having ad-dresses with access types of “read-only” or “read-write”. Input “0” to havethe Network Interface Board accept requests from any host without requiringa specific type of access.

Access Type Type of access which is permitted

read Read only access is permitted.

write Read and write access is permitted.

trap User is notified of trap messages.

no All access is denied.

Page 283: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Remote Maintenance by Telnet (mshell)

67

5

The following example shows how set the protocol for an address. msh> snmp number {ip | ipx} address

Note❒ When using the TCP/IP protocol, input ip followed by a space and then

the IP address.❒ When using the IPX/SPX protocol, input ipx followed by a space and then

the IPX address followed by a decimal and then the MAC address of theNetwork Interface Board.

The following is an example of how to configure registration number 3 withthe IP address 192.168.15.16.msh> snmp 3 ip 192.168.15.16The following is an example of how to configure registration number 3 withthe IPX address 7390A448, and the MAC address 00:00:74:62:5C:65.msh> snmp 3 ipx 7390A448.000074625C65

Changing the Password

Use the passwd command to change the remote maintenance password.

Important❒ Be sure not to forget or lose the password.

Note❒ The default factory password is “password”.

A Input “passwd”.

msh> passwd

B Input the current password.

Old password:

C Input the new password.

New password:

Note❒ The password must consist of 3 to 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols.

Upper and lower case characters are considered unique. For example, R isdifferent from r.

❒ The password is the same as that used in the configuration of the NetworkInterface Board using a Web browser and that used in the NIB Setup Tool.If you change a password on the mshell, the other passwords are alsochanged.

D Input the new password once again.

Retype new password:

Page 284: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

68

5

SNMP

The Network Interface Board functions as a SNMP (Simple Network Manage-ment Protocol) agent using the UDP and IPX protocols. Using the SNMP man-ager you can get information about the printer.The factory default community names are “public” and “admin”. You can getMIB information using these community names.

ReferenceFor more information on configuring the community name, refer to P.65 “SN-MP” in “Remote Maintenance by Telnet (mshell)”.

Limitation❒ The kinds of supported MIBs differ depending on your printer.

❖ Supported MIBs• MIB-II• PrinterMIB• HostResourceMIB• RicohPrivateMIB

Page 285: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Understanding the Displayed Information

69

5

Understanding the Displayed Information

This section describes how to read the displayed information on the status of theNetwork Interface Board.

Print Job Information

The status of the print job can be viewed using the following commands.• mshell : Use the status command ⇒ P.64 “Status of Printer”.

Item Name Meaning

ID Number of the print request.

Source The name of the host requesting the print job.

Process The type of print command.

Status Status of print job.

• ActivePrinting or being prepared for printing.

• WaitingWaiting to be transferred to the printer.

Time The time when the print request was received.

Page 286: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

70

5

Print Log Information

This is a record of jobs that have been printed up to now. The most recent tenrecords are displayed.This record can be displayed with the following commands.• mshell : Use the prnlog command ⇒ P.64 “Status of Printer”.

Item Name Meaning

ID Printing request number.

Source The user name, workstation name or address of the host that sent the print job.

Process The type of print command used.

Bytes The size of the file in bytes.

Result Communication result.

• OKIndicates that the print job was completed correctly.

• NGIndicates that the print job was not completed normally.

• Canceledrcp, rsh or lpr print commands were stopped. A problem occurred with the printing application. This message doesn't appear when ftp or RPRINTER is used.

Time The time when the print request was received.

User The user name, workstation name or address of the host that sent the print job.

Address IP address.

Process The type of print command used.

Print Start Time The time the print process was started.

Print End Time The time the print process was completed.

Open Count The number of print processes that the application made.

Eof Count The reception number of file unit.

Data Size The number of bytes of received data.

Page 287: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Understanding the Displayed Information

71

5

Network Statistical Information

This section is about the information provided about the Network InterfaceBoard.Detailed information about the words used to describe the status of the NetworkInterface Board are described below.• mshell : Use info command ⇒ P.64 “Status of Printer”.

Item Name Meaning

System elapsed time The time that passed since the network interface board started.

Total printing time The total time spent in processing the print data.

Total open count The total open (printing process) count that application re-quired.

Current connection count

The number of job connecting with the Network Interface Board currently.

Total connection count The total number of print jobs sent to the Network Interface Board.

Print error count The number of times the printing process sent an error mes-sage.

Access error count The number of times the connection was refused because of the value of the access control.

Print request full count The number of times a connection was refused because the number of print requests exceeded the number of allowed sessions.

Page 288: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

72

5

Configuring the Network Interface Board

Network Interface Board settings can be displayed and confirmed using thecommands below.• mshell : Use show command ⇒ P.65 “Information about the Network Interface

Board Configuration Settings”.

Item Name Meaning

Common

Mode

Protocol Up/Down

AppleTalk

TCP/IP

NetWare

NetBEUI

NVRAM version

Device name

Comment

Location

Contact

Soft switch

Up means active, Down means inactive.

Internal version number.

AppleTalk

Mode

Net

Object

Type

Zone

AppleTalk protocol in selection.

Network number.

Macintosh printer name.

The type of printer.

Name of the zone that the printer belongs to.

Page 289: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Understanding the Displayed Information

73

5

TCP/IP

Mode

ftp

lpr

rsh

diprint

web

telnet

download

EncapType

Network boot

Filter

Max DSTs

Address

Netmask

Broadcast

Gateway

AccessCtrl

AccessMask

Time server

Home page URL

Home page link name

Help page URL

SNMP protocol

Up means active, Down means inactive.

Frame type.

Network boot.

Internal parameter.

IP address.

Subnet mask.

Broadcast address.

Default gateway address.

Access control address.

Access control mask.

URL of homepage.

URL name of homepage.

URL of help page.

Protocol used with SNMP.

Item Name Meaning

Page 290: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

74

5

NetWare

Mode

EncapType

RPRINTER number

RPRINTER name

Print server name

File server name

Context name

Switch

Mode

NDS/Bindery

Packet negotiation

Print job timeout

(this value is fixed)

Frame type.

Remote printer number.

Remote printer name.

Print server name.

Name of the connect file server.

Context of print server.

Active mode.

(this value is fixed)

Time of the job timeout.

NetBEUI

Mode

Switch

Mode

Direct print

Notification

Workgroup name

Computer name

Comment

Share name[1]

(this value is fixed)

(this value is fixed)

(this value is fixed)

Notices of finishing to print.

Name of the workgroup.

Name of the computer.

Comment.

Share name. (name of the printer type)

Shell mode Mode of remote maintenance tool.

Item Name Meaning

Page 291: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Message List

75

5

Message List

This is a list of messages recorded to the printer's system log. The system log canbe viewed using the syslog command.

System Log Information

You can use the following methods to view the system log.• mshell : Use the syslog command ⇒ P.65 “System Log Information”.• Network Configuration Page : Configure PCL for the Printer Language, and

push the switch on the Network Interface Board while five seconds ⇒ P.84“Network Configuration Page”.

Message When the Network Interface Board Starts or Restarts.

RICOH Network Interface Board Ver.x.x.x

The version number of the Network Inter-face Board.

PRINTER SYSTEM “system name” Ver.x.x.x

The system name and version of the print-er.

Attach FileServer=“file server name” The printer is attached to “file server name” as the nearest server.

Current Interface Speed:xxxMbps The speed of the network (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps).

Current IPX address The current IPX address.

Frametype=“frame type name” The "frame type name" is configured to be used on NetWare.

NetBEUI Computer Name=“computer name”

The NetBEUI Computer Name is defined as "computer name".

Start httpd The Web server has been started.

Start npmpd for IPX The npmpd for IPX protocol has been started.

Start npmpd for TCP/IP The npmpd for TCP/IP protocol has been started.

Start smbd direct print mode(NetBEUI) You can print from a client on the Win-dows network via the print server.

Start snmpd Ver.2.0 The SNMP agent of the displayed version has been started.

Vendor= , Country= , Lang= The vendor, the country code, and the lan-guage.

Page 292: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

76

5

NetWare (When the Network Interface Board is Started)

❖ When working as a print server

❖ When working as a remote printer

Access to NetWare server “file server name” denied. Either there is no account for this print server on the NetWare server or the password was incorrect.

Cannot log in to the file server. Confirm that the print server is registered on the file server. If a password is specified for the print server, delete it.

Attach to print queue “print queue name” Attached to the print queue.

File server is empty The file server is not registered. Register your file server using the utility.

Login to fileserver “file server name” (“NDS|BINDERY”)

Logged in to the file server with NDS or BINDERY mode.

Open log file “file name” The specified log file has been opened.

Printer “printer name” has no queue The print queue is not assigned to the printer. Using NWAdmin, assign the print queue to the printer, and then restart it.

Print queue “print queue name” cannot be serviced by printer 0, “print server name”

Print services are not available for the print queue. Confirm that the volume of the print queue exists on the specified file server.

The print server received error “error number” during attempt to log in to the network.Access to the network was de-nied.Verify that the print server name and password are correct.

Cannot log in to the file server. The print server is not registered or the password is specified. Register the print server with-out specifying a password.

Cannot create service connection Cannot establish a connection with the file server. Your request may exceed the max-imum number of connections that the file server can deal with at a time.

Cannot find rprinter (“print server name”/”printer number”)

The printer having the number displayed on the print server does not exist. Confirm the number of the printer registered to the print server.

Establish a connection with the print serv-er, “print server name”

A connection with the print server has been established.

Page 293: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Message List

77

5NetBEUI (When the Network Interface Board is Started)

No local target for “print server name” Cannot get routing information on the file server. If a different frame type is config-ured from that used on the network, you should select "Auto Select" as a frame type.

Required file server (“file server name”) not found

Cannot find the required file server.

Required print server (“print server name”) not found

Cannot find the print server. Confirm the name of the print server.

Unable to attach to print server (“print server name”)

Cannot connect to the print server. The print server refuses a connection for some reason. Confirm the configuration of the print server.

Back to default name (<Computer name>) The same Computer name is detected on the network. As unable to add computer name to the suffix, Computer name back to default name. Configure a new com-puter name that is unique one.

Print session full Cannot accept the print session.

Required computer name (<Computer name>) is duplicated name

The same Computer name is detected on the network. The start job determines the computer name by adding the computer name to the suffix (0,1....). Configure a new computer name that is unique one.

Page 294: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

78

5

TCP/IP

❖ When the address is configured

❖ When using lpr

At the beginning of the message, the IP address of the client is displayed with-in parentheses.

Invalid gateway address The Gateway address is not correct for the specified IP address.

filter data error Some data cannot be handled by the filter option. Confirm the file code and the set-tings of the filter option.

lost connection The connection was cut by a counterpart. Check the printer to which you requested to print.

print requests full Cannot accept the print request (max. 5 sessions). Confirm the status of the printer with mshell, and print it again after the print request becomes less than 5 sessions.

printer permission denied Cannot get a permission to use the print-er. Confirm the access rights with the ac-cess control address and the access control mask.

printer refuse Something is wrong with your printer. Confirm the status of the printer.

Page 295: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Message List

79

5

❖ When using SNMP

Error numbers in the messages are codes for internal use.

Exit snmpd The agent is complete. Reset the printer or turn the printer off and on.

recvfrom:packet discarded,length(Recep-tion packet length)> (Packet size),from addr <Address of partner point>

The received packet was ignored since the length of the packet exceeds the limit. Confirm whether the administration sta-tion sent a packet whose length is longer than 1025 bytes.

session <Community name appointed> not defined

The community name of the received packet is not defined. Confirm that the community name of the administration station is the same as that specified to the printer.

snmpin:Bad use of session <community Name> from <Address>

The community name of the received packet is not the same as that of the ad-ministration station. Confirm the com-munity name specified to the printer.

snmpin:error in snmpdecipher,code (<Er-ror No.>)

An error occurred on the received packet. Check if the number of the objects sent from the administration station is more than 31 and if there are wrong MIB re-quests.

snmpin:error in snmpservsend,code (<Er-ror No.>)

Cannot send a response packet. Normal-ly, this message is followed by the mes-sages below *1 *2.

snmpin:pkt too large,code (<Error num-ber>)*1

The response packet to the request is too big to send. Reduce the number of the ob-jects per request.

snmpin:error in sending too large request back,code (<Error number>),giving up*2

The packet notifying the error is too big to send. Reduce the number of the objects per request.

snmpin:received bad version The version of the received packet is in-valid. Confirm that the version of the ad-ministration station is version-1(0).

Page 296: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

80

5

Precautions

Please pay attention to the following when using a network interface board.When configuration is necessary, give a messenger after configuring justly.

Connecting a dial up router to a Network

When the file server of NetWare exists in the network of remote side, the routercontinues being connected by a packet sent from printer, there may be a thingasked great communication charges. Because this is a thing by specification ofNetWare, you need to cope by network administration shown in the followingin order to evade this problem. Please cope with configuration of printer whenyou cannot cope in network administration.

Correspondence Method on Network Administration

Filter the packets so that they do not pass over the dial up router.

Note❒ The MAC address of the printer doing the filtering is printed on the printer

configuration page. Refer to the Operating Instructions, for information onprinting a configuration page.

❒ See the instructions below for information on configuring the printer if therouter cannot be configured.

Correspondence Method by Configuration of Printer (When Use NetWare)

A Following the setup method in this manual, configure the file server.

B Set the frame type for a NetWare environment.

ReferenceFor more information on selecting a frame type, refer to the Operating In-structions for your printer.

Correspondence Method by Configuration of Printer (When do not Use NetWare)

AWhile not printing, the Network Interface Board sends packets on the net-work. Set the NetWare to inactive.

ReferenceFor more information on selecting a protocol, refer to Operating Instruc-tions for your printer.

Page 297: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Precautions

81

5

When Printing PostScript from Windows

When print PostScript from Windows, refer to the Operating Instructions thatcomes with the optional PostScript 3, and configure to use the Network InterfaceBoard with your printer driver.

When print it with NetWare

Configuration of form feed

You should not configure of form feed on NetWare. You do not need to config-ure on NetWare in order to control newpage with printer driver of Windows.There is the case that cannot print it justly when you configure.If you want to do not do form feed, configure according to OS using it as follows.• In case of Windows 3.1x, remove a check of [Form feed ] in [Network Settings ] di-

alog.• In case of Windows95/98, you remove a check of [Form feed ] with [Printer Set-

tings ] tab of property of printer.

Configuration of banner page

Please do not configure of banner page on NetWare.If you want to do not add banner page, configure according to OS using it as fol-lows.• In case of Windows 3.1x, remove a check of [Enable banner ] in [Network Settings ]

dialog.• In case of Windows95/98, you remove a check of [Enable banner ] with [Printer

Settings ] tab of property of printer.

Printing after Resetting the Printer

After resetting the remote printer, it will be cut off from the print server for about30-40 seconds before connecting again. Due to the NetWare specification, printjobs may be accepted, but they will not be printed during this interval.When using the printer as a remote printer, wait about 2 minutes after resettingthe printer before attempting to print.

Page 298: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

82

5

When Using DHCP

The following points are important when using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configu-ration Protocol).

Supported Systems

Windows NT Server 4.0 can be configured as a DHCP server.

Give the printer a static address

Configure the DHCP server to so that the printer has a static address.

Note❒ When multiple DHCP servers exist, turn an equal reservation into all DHCP

server. A Network Interface Board works by information from DHCP serverreplied to in the first place.

Follow these steps to provide the printer with a static IP address.

A Start the DHCP manager.

B Select the scope that will be used, and on the [Scope ] menu, click [Reserva-tion ].

C Enter the IP address into [IP Address ].

D Enter the MAC address of the Network Interface Board into [Unique Identifi-er].

Note❒ Do not use hyphens to separate the numbers.❒ If you don't know the MAC address, it can be found on the “configuration

page” printed by the printer.

E Input a name and comment into the [Client Name ] and [Client Comment ] boxes.

Note❒ For additional information about client names, please refer to P.83 “The

Others”.

F Click [Add ].

An IP address is reserved.

G Click [Close ], to close dialog.

Page 299: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Precautions

83

5

The Others

• When you click [Active Lease ] on the [Scope ] menu of DHCP manager, a list ofclient leases appears. When the reserved IP address is not assigned to a Net-work Interface Board, a client name of this dialog appears the name that wasinput into with [Add Reserved Clients ] dialog. When the reserved IP address isassigned to a Network Interface Board and comes to use it, an appearing cli-ent name changes in a printer name configured by Network Interface Board.However, only 13 characters appear here from the beginning of printer name.

• When IP address is not assigned by the DHCP server, the Network InterfaceBoard uses 11.22.33.44 as temporary IP address. You can confirm the printer'sIP address on the network configuration page. ⇒ P.84 “Network ConfigurationPage”

• Because 11.22.33.44 is a special IP address, you cannot print using this ad-dress.

• When used DHCP relay agent with the environment that dial up router wasconnected to a network, router is connected whenever packet can leave out-going from Network Interface Board, and there may be the thing that greatcommunication charges suffer.

When using the NIB Setup Tool

If the Network Interface Board is not browsed using the TCP/IP protocol, checkif the TCP/IP environment is correctly configured in your computer.

Page 300: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

84

5

Network Configuration Page

You can confirm the network information on the network configuration page.

A Confirm that the printer is online.

B Push the switch on the Network Interface Board for two seconds, and re-lease it.

The network configuration page is printed.

Note❒ If you push the switch for five seconds, the system log information is print-

ed. For more information on the meaning of the data printed , refer to P.75“System Log Information”.

Page 301: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Network Configuration Page

85

5

1. MAC address

2. Printer name

3. TCP/IPIP addressSubnet maskDefault gateway addressAccess control addressAccess control maskNetwork boot(Command boot)Frame type* : The current configuration is dis-played in DHCP active.

4. NetWareIPX addressFrame typeRemote printer numberPrint server nameName of the connect file server

Active mode

5. NetBEUI(this value is fixed)Workgroup nameComputer nameShare nameNetwork path name

6. AppleTalkNetwork numberMacintosh printer nameThe type of printerName of the zone that printer belongto

Node Number : 00:00:74:62:5c:65Soft Switch : 0x41dcPrinter name : NET_PRINTER

TCP/IP ( Up )IP Address : 192.168.015.016Netmask : 255.255.255.000Gateway : 000.000.000.000AccessCtrl : 000.000.000.000 (0x00000000)AccessMask : 000.000.000.000 (0x00000000)Auto IP(Nboot) : DHCPMode : 0x40 0x01EncapType : DIX Ethernet IICurrent Hostname : NET_PRINTERCurrent IP Address : 192.168.015.018Current Netmask : 255.255.255.000Current Gateway : 000.000.000.000

NetWare ( Up )IPX Address : 7390A448:000074625C65EncapType : AutoRPRINTER number : 0Print server name : PSERV.NETWORK.DSFile server name : CAREEMode : Print server

NetBEUI ( Up )Switch : 0x06Workgroup name : WORKGROUPComputer name : NET_PRINTERShare name : IPSiO_NX700Current path name : \\NET_PRINTER\IPSiO_NX700

AppleTalk ( Up )Mode : EtherTalk phase 2Net : 0x3f7aObject : IPSiO NX700Type : LaserWriterZone : *

1

2

3

4

*

5

6

Page 302: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Appendix

86

5

Specifications

LAN interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T

Frame type EthernetII, IEEE802.2, IEEE802.3, SNAP

Protocol • IPX/SPXNetWare 3.11, 3.12, 3.2, 4.1, 4.11, 5, IntranetWare

• TCP/IPWindows 95Windows 98Windows NT 4.0

• NetBEUIWindows 95Windows 98Windows NT 4.0

• AppleTalkMac OS 7.1 or later

SNMP MIB-II, PrinterMIB, HostResourceMIB, RicohPrivateMIB

Page 303: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

87

INDEXA

access control address, 62access control mask, 62ARP+PING, 59, 63

B

BOOTP, 63

C

client computer, setupWindows 3.1x, 46Windows 95/98, 23, 45Windows NT 4.0, 24

community name, 66configuration

LPR port printing, Windows NT 4.0, 25Macintosh, 49NetWare, 27NetWare 3.x, 32NetWare 4.x, 5, 38Web browser, 56Windows 95/98, 7Windows NT 4.0, 15

D

default gateway address, 62DHCP, 63, 82dial up router, precautions, 80

E

EtherTalk, 49

I

informationNetwork Interface Board configuration, 65, 72Network Statistics, 71print job, 69print log, 70system log, 65, 75

installMulti Direct Print, Windows 95/98, 10Multi Direct Print, Windows NT 4.0, 19NIB Setup Tool, 27

IP address, 59, 61

L

LPR port Printing, Windows NT 4.0, 25

M

MAC address, 59Macintosh, configuration, 49message, 75MIB, 68mshell, 60Multi Direct Print, 53Multi Direct Print, install

Windows 95/98, 10Windows NT 4.0, 19

N

NetWare 3.x, configuration, 32NetWare 4.x, 5, configuration, 38NetWare, configuration, 27network boot, 63NIB Setup Tool

install, 27precautions, 83quick setup, 29

P

password, 57, 67precautions, 80print server, setup

NetWare 3.x, 32NetWare 4.x, 5, 38

R

RARP+TFTP, 63remote printer, setup

NetWare 3.x, 35NetWare 4.x, 5, 41

S

setupclient computer, Windows 3.1x, 46client computer, Windows 95/98, 23, 45client computer, Windows NT 4.0, 24printer driver, Windows 95/98, 11printer driver, Windows NT 4.0, 20

SNMP, 65, 68

Page 304: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

88

specifications, 86status of printer, 64subnet mask, 62

U

uninstallMulti Direct Print, Windows 95/98, 13Multi Direct Print, Windows NT 4.0, 22

W

Web browser, 56Windows 95/98, configuration, 7Windows NT 4.0, configuration, 15

Z

Zone, 51

Page 305: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

89 UE USA EE GB B307

Page 306: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Note to users in the United States of America

Notice:This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residentialinstallation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used inaccordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does causeharmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, theuser is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

WarningChanges or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's author-ity to operate the equipment.

Caution (in case of IEEE1284 or 100BASE-TX environment):Properly shielded and grounded cables (STP) and connectors must be used for connections to host computer (and/orperipheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.

Caution (in case of 100BASE-TX environment):AC adapter with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.

Declaration of ConformityProduct Name: Network Interface BoardModel Number: Type185–EResponsible party: Ricoh CorporationAddress: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006Telephone number: 973-882-2000This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and2. this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation.Note to users in Canada

Note:This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada

Avertissement:Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

Declaration of Conformity“The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC.”WarningChanges or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's author-ity to operate the equipment.In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch: a means POWER ON.b means POWER OFF.

Copyright © 1999

Page 307: Operating Instructions - Copy Reference (USA): Russian C1a ... · PDF fileWest Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 ... prohibits the repair of laser-based optical ... among other information,

Ne

two

rk Interfa

ce

Boa

rd Typ

e185–E (O

ptio

n) O

PERATIN

G IN

STRUC

TION

S

UE USA B307-8617

EE GB